Palm 700p User Guide

®
Sprint PCS Service
Sprint Power Vision Smart Device
Treo™ 700P by Palm
www.sprint.com
© Sprint Nextel. All rights reserved. No reproduction in whole
or in part without prior written approval. Sprint, the “Going
Forward” logo, and other trademarks are trademarks of Sprint
Nextel.
Printed in the U.S.A.
PN: 406-10412-00
v. 1 0
Intellectual Property Notices
© 2006 Palm, Inc. All rights reserved. Blazer, HotSync, Palm, Palm OS, Treo device, VersaMail, and the Palm and Treo
device logos are among the trademarks or registered trademarks owned by or licensed to Palm, Inc. This product contains ACCESS Co., Ltd.’s NetFront 3.0 Internet browser software. © 1996-2005 ACCESS Co., Ltd. and ACCESS Systems
America, Inc. NetFront is the trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other countries
except the United States of America. NetFront is a registered trademark of NetFront Communications, Inc. in the
United States of America and is used under a license. A portion of this software includes software modules developed
by the Independent JPEG group. Documents To Go is a trademark or registered trademark of DataViz, Inc. A portion of
the enclosed product is © copyrighted by Fraunhofer IIS (2005). GoodLink is a trademark or registered trademark of
Good Technology, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Excel, and PowerPoint are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other brand
and product names are or may be trademarks of, and are used to identify products or services of, their respective owners.
This product is protected by one or more of the following United States patents:
6,976,226; 6,975,304; 6,965,375; 6,961,567; 6,961,029; 6,957,397;
6,952,571; 6,950,988; 6,947,975; 6,947,017; 6,943,667; 6,940,490;
6,924,752; 6,907,233; 6,906,701; 6,906,741; 6,901,276; 6,850,780;
6,845,408; 6,842,628; 6,842,335; 6,831,662; 6,819,552; 6,804,699;
6,795,710; 6,788,285; 6,781,824; 6,781,575; 6,766,490; 6,745,047;
6,744,451; 6,738,852; 6,732,105; 6,724,720; 6,721,892; 6,712,638;
6,708,280; 6,697,639; 6,687,839; 6,685,328; 6,665,803; 6,618,044
;6,590,588; 6,539,476; 6,532,148 ;6,523,124; 6,519,141; 6,516,202;
6,490,155; 6,480,146; 6,457,134; 6,456,247; 6,442,637; 6,441,824;
6,437,543; 6,429,625; 6,425,087; 6,389,572; 6,388,877; 6,381,650;
6,363,082; 6,344,848; 6,317,085; 6,241,537; 6,222,857; 6,185,423;
6,147,314; 6,115,248; 6,064,342; D421,251; D429,252; D466,128;
D478,091. Patent pending.
This product also is licensed under United States patent 6,058,304.
MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. This product is protected by
certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this
product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary.
All rights reserved.
Disclaimer and Limitation of Liability
Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this guide. Palm,
Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties that may arise through the use of
this software. Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data
as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other
media to protect against data loss.
Table of Contents
Welcome to Sprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
How to Use This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Section 1: Setting Up Your Smart Device and Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1A. Setting Up Your Sprint Power Vision Smart Device Treo™ 700P by Palm . . . . 3
What You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Your New Treo 700P Smart Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Inserting the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1B. Setting Up Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Making Your First Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Setting Up Your Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating Sprint PCS® Account Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1C. Connecting to Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Why Connect My Device to My Computer? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Upgrading From Another Palm OS® Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Installing the Desktop Synchronization Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Synchronizing Information—The Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Section 2: Your Treo™ 700P Smart Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
2A. Moving Around on Your Smart Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Moving Around the Device Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Opening Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2B. Using Your Device’s Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Turning Your Device On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Opening the Phone Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Making Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Receiving Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Using Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Managing Active Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Using Sprint PCS® Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Defining Favorite Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Using a Phone Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Customizing Phone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Controlling Your Roaming Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Section 3: Using Sprint PCS Vision® and Other Wireless Connections . . . 105
3A. Sprint PCS Vision®—The Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Getting Started With Sprint PCS Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Sprint Power Vision Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Accessing Sprint PCS Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
SM
3B. Sprint Power Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Getting to Know Sprint Power Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Personalizing Your Service With On Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Using Your Device’s Phone as a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
3C. Using Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
What Email Applications Can I Use on My Smart Device? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
The VersaMail Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Sprint PCS Business ConnectionSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Using GoodLink™ Wireless Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
3D. Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Creating and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Using Messaging to Chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Managing Your Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Customizing Your Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Using Online Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
3E. Browsing the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Viewing a Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Working With Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Working With Bookmarks and Saved Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Customizing Your Web Browser Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
3F. Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking . . . . . . . . 173
Connecting to Devices With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Using Your Device as a Wireless Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Section 4: Your Portable Media Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
4A. Working With Your Pictures and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Taking Pictures and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Customizing Your Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Viewing Pictures and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Organizing Pictures and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Using Your Online Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Viewing Pictures and Videos on Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
4B. Listening to Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Setting Up Windows Media Player for MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Transferring MP3 Files From Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Transferring Music From a CD to Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Listening to Music on Your Treo Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
SM
4C. Watching Sprint TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Accessing Streamed Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Viewing Streamed Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Section 5: Your Mobile Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5A. Using Your Device’s Organizer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
5B. Increasing Your Productivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Using the Documents Application to Work With Your Office Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Voice Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Section 6: Managing Your Information and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
6A. Managing Files and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Installing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Removing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Viewing Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Sending Information Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Beaming Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Synchronizing Information—Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Using Expansion Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
6B. Customizing Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Setting System Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Adjusting the Display and Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Changing the Applications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Customizing Device Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Optimizing Power Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Locking Your Device and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Using Connection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Purchasing Accessories for Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Section 7: Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
7A. Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Trouble Upgrading? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Resetting Your Treo 700P Smart Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Making Room on Your Treo 700P Smart Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Third-Party Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Where to Learn More . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
7B. Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Section 8: Safety and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
8A. Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Using Your Phone With a Hearing Aid Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Caring for the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Radiofrequency (RF) Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Owner’s Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
User’s Guide Proprietary Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
8B. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Welcome to Sprint
Sprint and Nextel have come together offering you more choice and flexibility to do
whatever you want, whenever you want.
This powerful combination brings you access to more products, more services,
and more of what you need to do more of what you want. Welcome to a future
full of possibility. Welcome to the new Sprint.
Welcome and thank you for choosing Sprint.
i
How to Use This Guide
We know you’re eager to start using your device right away, and the sections of
this guide are designed to help you do just that.
⽧
Section 1: Setting Up Your Smart Device and Your Computer guides you through
the process of setting up your new Treo™ 700P smart device, your Sprint PCS®
Service, and your computer.
⽧
Section 2: Your Treo™ 700p Smart Device shows you the basics of your device and
service with quick, easy-to-follow instructions. This section also describes the
features of your device’s phone and shows you how to use Sprint PCS service
features such as voicemail, call waiting, and call forwarding.
⽧
Section 3: Using Sprint PCS Vision® and Other Wireless Connections shows you
how to use Sprint PCS Vision features, including Web browsing, messaging,
and email. It also describes other types of wireless connections such as
Bluetooth® wireless technology.
⽧
Section 4: Your Portable Media Device shows you how to use your device’s
camera—including how to use the Sprint PCS® Picture Mail application—and
how to transfer and listen to music files on your device.
⽧
Section 5: Your Mobile Organizer guides you through the process of using the
built-in, full-featured, Palm OS® organizer that gives you instant access to your
Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, Memos, Calculator, and more.
ii
⽧
Section 6: Managing Your Information and Settings describes the tools for
managing files and applications and the preferences that enable you to
customize your device.
⽧
Section 7: Resources answers frequently asked questions and shows you what
to do if something goes wrong. It also includes a helpful glossary of terms.
⽧
Section 8: Safety and Specifications outlines recommended safety
and maintenance guidelines and displays the technical specifications for your
Treo 700P smart device.
WARNING:
Please refer to “Important Safety Information” on page 361 to learn
about information that will help you safely use your phone. Failure to
read and follow the Important Safety Information in this phone guide
may result in serious bodily injury, death, or property damage.
iii
iv
Section 1
Setting Up Your Smart Device
and Your Computer
2
S e c ti o n 1 A
Device Setup
Setting Up Your Sprint Power Vision Smart Device
Treo™ 700P by Palm
In This Section
⽧
What You Need
⽧
Your New Treo 700P Smart Device
⽧
Inserting the Battery
⽧
Charging the Battery
Section 1A: Device Setup
3
What You Need
Your Treo™ 700P smart device box contains the following:
Hardware
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
Treo device
Rechargeable battery
AC charger
USB sync cable
Stereo headset
Sprint® charger adapter
Documentation
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
4
Read This First poster
Welcome to Sprint pamphlet
Sprint Power Vision Smart Device Treo™ 700P by Palm Quick Reference Guide
Email on Your Sprint Power Vision Smart Device Treo™ 700P by Palm booklet
Introducing the Sprint Power Vision Network pamphlet
Terms & Conditions
Warranty
Software License Agreement
Audible insert
Section 1A: Device Setup
Software
Device Setup
䢇
Palm Software Installation CD (includes desktop synchronization software
and bonus software for your device)
You’ll also need the following items to complete the installation and activation:
䢇 An activated Sprint PCS® service plan
䢇 A location with wireless coverage for your device
䢇 An electrical outlet
䢇 The computer with which you will synchronize your personal information
Section 1A: Device Setup
5
Your New Treo 700P Smart Device
Your Device’s Features: Front View
1. Indicator
Light
2. Earpiece
3. 5-way
Navigator
4. Power/End
Button
12. Volume
Button
5. Applications
Button
11. Side
Button
6. Menu
Button
10. Talk Button
9. Phone Button
8. Calendar Button
6
7. Messaging
Button
Section 1A: Device Setup
1. Indicator Light provides status information for your device based on the color
Device Setup
of the light and the blink state.
2. Earpiece serves as the speaker on your device when you are not using the
speakerphone feature or a headset.
3. 5-way Navigator gives you one-handed access to moving around the device
screen and selecting options. See “Moving Around the Device Screen” on
page 40 for instructions.
4. Power/End Button turns the device’s phone on and off, wakes up and turns
off the screen, and hangs up calls.
5. Applications Button opens Applications view.
6. Menu Button opens the application menus.
7. Messaging Button opens the Messaging application. If you downloaded and
SM
installed the Sprint PCS Business Connection application, this button
SM
opens Business Connection (see “Sprint PCS Business Connection ” on
page 142 for information).
8. Calendar Button opens the Calendar application.
9. Phone Button opens the Phone application.
10. Talk Button dials when a phone number is selected or entered, and answers
an incoming phone call.
11. Side Button records voice memos by default, and performs context-sensitive
actions when an application is open, such as playing or pausing MP3 files in
the Pocket Tunes™ application. You can also reassign this button to open
your favorite application.
12. Volume Button adjusts the earpiece, speaker, and ringer volume levels.
Section 1A: Device Setup
7
Your Device’s Features: Back View
13. Camera Lens
(camera
version
only)
14. Self-Portrait
Mirror
15. Battery Door
Release
16. Headset
Jack
19. Speaker
18. Microphone
17. Multi-connector
13. Camera Lens enables you to take pictures using the built-in camera (if
included). There are two models of the Treo 700P smart device: One comes
with a camera and the other does not. The packaging for your device
identifies whether a camera is included.
14. Self-Portrait Mirror enables you to take a picture of yourself (if your device
includes a camera).
15. Battery Door Release opens the battery compartment.
8
Section 1A: Device Setup
16. Headset Jack enables you to connect a hands-free headset. Use only
17. Multi-connector enables you to attach the USB sync cable and AC charger to
your device. You can connect the charger either to the sync cable connector
or directly to the charger jack on the Multi-connector.
18. Microphone serves as the mouthpiece on your device’s phone.
19. Speaker plays ringtones and alarms, and serves as the speaker for the
speakerphone feature.
Note:
The Treo 700P smart device speaker includes a large magnet, so be sure to keep
your device away from credit cards or other items that could become
demagnetized.
Section 1A: Device Setup
9
Device Setup
headsets that are compatible with your device.
Your Device’s Features: Top View
21. Infrared (IR) Port
20. Ringer Switch
22. Antenna
24. Stylus
23. Expansion Card Slot
20. Ringer Switch controls the ringer setting. See “Setting System Sounds” on
page 284 for details on changing the settings. Silencing the ringer turns off
all system sounds, including alarms.
21. Infrared (IR) Port uses infrared technology to transmit information to and
receive information from other infrared-enabled devices that use
compatible software.
22. Antenna receives and sends wireless communication signals. The antenna
does not telescope out of your device.
23. Expansion Card Slot allows you to expand the capabilities of your device
using a MultiMediaCard, SD, or SDIO card. See “Using Expansion Cards” on
page 276.
24. Stylus allows you to tap options on your device’s screen. To use the stylus,
slide it out of the slot and hold it as you would a pen or pencil.
10
Section 1A: Device Setup
WARNING:
Device Setup
Inserting the Battery
Use only Sprint-approved or manufacturer-approved batteries and
chargers with your device. The failure to use a Sprint-approved or
manufacturer-approved battery and charger may increase the risk that
your device will overheat, catch fire, or explode, resulting in serious bodily
injury, death, or property damage.
1. Use one hand to press the Battery Door Release button, and use your other
hand to slide the battery door downward to remove it from your device.
Battery Door Release
Button
Battery
Contacts
Battery
Compartment
Contacts
Notch
2. Align the battery contacts with the battery compartment contacts.
Section 1A: Device Setup
11
3. Insert the battery into the compartment at a 45-degree angle, and then
press it into place.
4. Slide the battery door onto the back of the device until it clicks into place.
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to set up your device.
Tip:
12
Buy an extra battery as a spare for long trips or heavy data use. Visit
www.palm.com to purchase batteries that are approved by Sprint and
that are compatible with your device.
Section 1A: Device Setup
Device Setup
Charging the Battery
The battery comes with a sufficient charge to complete the setup process and
activate your phone. After activation, we recommend charging your device for
three and a half hours to give it a full charge. See “Maximizing Battery Life” on
page 16 for tips on maximizing the life of your device’s battery.
1. Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
2. Connect the charger cable to the charger jack on the bottom of the device.
Make sure the arrow on the connector is facing up, toward your Treo device
screen.
3. To confirm that your device is charging, check the indicator light.
䡲
䡲
Red indicates that your device is charging.
Green indicates that your device is fully charged.
Indicator Light
Section 1A: Device Setup
13
If the battery is fully drained, it may take a few moments for the indicator light to
turn on while the battery is charging.
The onscreen battery icon displays the power status:
䢇
Full battery icon : Battery is not connected to a wall outlet and is fully
charged.
䢇
Partial battery icon : Battery is not connected to a wall outlet and has some
power but is not fully charged.
䢇
Almost-empty battery icon with red at the bottom : Battery needs to be
charged immediately.
Note:
Your device’s indicator light blinks red when the battery needs to be
charged.
䢇
Red lightning bolt
䢇
Green lightning bolt
: Battery is connected to a wall outlet and is charging.
: Battery is connected to a wall outlet and is fully
charged.
Tip:
14
To see exactly how much power is left in your battery, tap the onscreen
battery icon.
Section 1A: Device Setup
Using a Sprint Charger Adapter
Device Setup
If the connector on your Sprint-approved 1 Amp AC charger or vehicle charger
doesn’t fit into the connector on the bottom of your device, use the included
Sprint charger adapter.
Warning:
Use only with 1 Amp AC chargers distributed by Sprint for your device.
Using any unapproved AC charger may destroy the AC charger and cause
a fire.
1. Plug the AC charger into a power
source.
2. Connect the Sprint charger adapter to
the charger jack on bottom of the
Treo 700P smart device.
3. Connect the charger cable to the
Sprint charger adapter.
Sprint Charger
Adapter
4. Charge your Treo 700P smart device as
described earlier.
Section 1A: Device Setup
15
Battery Life
Battery life depends on individual use. Consumption factors include signal
strength, speakerphone use, and use of wireless features.
If the battery drains to the point where your device doesn’t turn on, the device
stores your information safely until you recharge the battery. To avoid draining
the battery, we recommend that you charge and synchronize your device every
day, especially if you use the wireless features of your phone often.
Note:
Using your device’s phone has an effect on the battery life. You can extend the
battery life by turning off your device’s phone while using the organizer
features. In any case, regular charging is recommended for optimal
performance.
Maximizing Battery Life
You can increase the life of your Treo 700P smart device battery by following a few
easy guidelines. Remember that battery life depends on how you use your device.
䢇 Charge your device whenever you’re at your desk, or charge it overnight each
day. The Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) battery has a much longer useful life when it is
topped off frequently, versus charging it after it is fully drained.
䢇 Your device’s wireless features (phone, email, messaging, Web, and any
SM
applications that use a Sprint Power Vision connection, such as Sprint TV)
and media features (camera, media players, eBooks, and games) consume
more power than its organizer features. If you spend a lot of time using the
wireless and media features, keep an eye on the battery icon and charge
when necessary.
䢇 If you don’t plan to use the wireless features on your device for awhile, turn
off your phone (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off” on page 55).
16
Section 1A: Device Setup
䢇
䢇
䢇
Section 1A: Device Setup
17
Device Setup
䢇
You can forward calls to a different number or let all calls be picked up by
voicemail (see “Call Forwarding” on page 73).
As with any mobile phone, if you are in an area with no wireless coverage,
your device searches for a signal, which consumes power. If you cannot move
to an area of better coverage, you may want to temporarily turn off your
phone. While your phone is off, you can continue to use your device’s
nonwireless features.
Turn down the screen brightness (see “Adjusting the Brightness” on
page 286).
Decrease the settings in Power Preferences and turn off Beam Receive (see
“Optimizing Power Settings” on page 296).
Turn off the Bluetooth® feature if you are not using it (see “Connecting to a
Bluetooth Hands-Free Device” on page 84).
18
Section 1A: Device Setup
S e c ti o n 1 B
Setting Up Service
Setting Up Service
In This Section
⽧
Making Your First Call
⽧
Setting Up Your Voicemail
⽧
Creating Sprint PCS® Account Passwords
Setting up service on your new Treo™ 700P smart device is quick and easy. This section
walks you through the necessary steps to unlock your device, set up your
voicemail, establish passwords, and contact Sprint for assistance with your
Sprint PCS® Service.
Section 1B: Setting Up Service
19
Making Your First Call
Determining If Your Device’s Phone Is Already Activated
If you received your device in the mail or purchased it at a Sprint Store, it probably
has already been activated. All you need to do is unlock it.
If your phone is not activated, please call Sprint at 1-888-211-4PCS (4727).
Unlocking Your Device
1. If the screen is off, press and release Power/End
to wake up the screen.
2. Press Center
on the 5-way navigator
to turn off Keyguard (see
“Moving Around the Device Screen” on page 40 for information on the
5-way
).
3. Enter your four-digit lock code. (For security purposes, the code is not visible
as you type.)
Note:
20
If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of either your
Social Security number or wireless phone number, or try 0000. If none of these
works, call Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4PCS (4727). See “Where to
Learn More” on page 350 for other ways to get help from Sprint if you are
having trouble with your service.
Section 1B: Setting Up Service
Making a Call
1. Press Phone
.
2. Press Center
Setting Up Service
on the 5-way navigator
to turn
off Keyguard (see “Locking Your Keyboard
(Keyguard)” on page 297 for information on
Keyguard).
3. Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the number you
want to call.
4. Press Talk
to dial.
5. After you finish the call, press Power/End
to
end the call.
Adjusting Call Volume
While a call is in progress, press the Volume button on the side of your device to
adjust the call volume.
䢇 To increase the volume, press the upper half of the Volume button.
䢇 To decrease the volume, press the lower half of the Volume button.
Section 1B: Setting Up Service
21
Volume Button
Side Button
What’s My Phone Number?
1. Make sure your phone is on (see
“Turning Your Device’s Phone On
and Off” on page 55 for
information).
2. Press Phone
Look Here for
Your Phone
Number
.
3. Open the menus
.
4. Select Options, and then select
Phone Info.
22
Section 1B: Setting Up Service
Setting Up Your Voicemail
To set up your voicemail:
1. Press Phone
䊳
.
Press and hold 1.
2. Follow the system prompts to:
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
Note:
Create your password.
Record your name announcement.
Record your greeting.
Choose whether or not to activate Skip Pass Code (a feature that lets
you access your voicemail simply by pressing and holding 1, bypassing
the need for you to enter your password). If you do not activate Skip
Pass Code, your device uses the Voicemail Pass Code feature, which
requires you to enter your password each time you want to access your
voicemail.
If you are concerned about unauthorized access to your voicemail account, we
recommend that you use the Voicemail Pass Code.
For more information about using your voicemail, see “Using Voicemail” on
page 64.
Section 1B: Setting Up Service
23
Setting Up Service
All unanswered calls to your device’s phone are automatically transferred to your
voicemail, even if your phone is in use or turned off.
Creating Sprint PCS® Account Passwords
As a Sprint PCS customer, you enjoy unlimited access to your personal account
information, your voicemail account, and your Sprint PCS Vision® or Sprint Power
Vision account. To ensure that no one else has access to your information, you
will need to create passwords to protect your privacy.
SM
Account Password
If you are the account owner, you’ll have an account password to sign on to
www.sprint.com and to use when calling Sprint Customer Service. Your default
account password is the last four digits of your Social Security number. If you are not
the account owner (if someone else pays for your Sprint PCS Service), you can get
a sub-account password at www.sprint.com.
Voicemail Password
You'll create your voicemail password when you set up your voicemail. See
“Setting Up Your Voicemail” on page 23.
Sprint PCS Vision or Sprint Power Vision Password
With your Treo 700P smart device, you may elect to set up a Sprint PCS Vision or
Sprint Power Vision password. This optional password can be used to authorize
the purchase of Premium Services content and to protect personal information
on multi-phone accounts.
For more information or to change your passwords, sign on to www.sprint.com or
call Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4PCS (4727).
24
Section 1B: Setting Up Service
Section 1C
Connecting to Your Computer
⽧
Why Connect My Device to My Computer?
⽧
Upgrading From Another Palm OS® Device
⽧
Installing the Desktop Synchronization Software
⽧
Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer
⽧
Synchronizing Information—The Basics
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
Computer Connection
In This Section
25
Why Connect My Device to My Computer?
You can enter or change information on your device or on your computer (using
Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for Windows), and then
synchronize to automatically update the information in both places, so there’s no
need to enter it twice. We strongly recommend that you synchronize your device
and your computer frequently to keep your information up-to-date (and backed
up) in both locations.
Before you can synchronize, you need to install the desktop synchronization
software on your computer and connect the sync cable to your computer.
System Requirements
Windows computers
䢇 Windows 2000 or XP (or later)
䢇 32MB of available memory (RAM)
䢇 170MB of free hard disk space
䢇 CD drive
䢇 Available USB port
Mac computers
䢇 Mac OS X version 10.2 or later
䢇 128MB of total memory (RAM)
䢇 190MB of free hard disk space
䢇 CD drive
䢇 Available USB port
26
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
Upgrading From Another Palm OS® Device
Note:
If you are setting up your first Palm OS® device, skip ahead to
“Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer” on page 32.
When you install Palm Desktop software, some third-party applications may be
quarantined because they are not compatible with the Palm OS software version
5.4.9 on your new Treo device. Quarantined files are not installed on your device,
nor are they deleted; these files are placed in a new folder on your computer:
C:\Program Files\Palm\<device name>\PalmOS5 Incompatible Apps. (On some
systems, Palm may be replaced with palmOne.)
Some third-party utilities allow you to back up your old device’s
information onto an expansion card and then transfer the information
to your Treo device. We do not recommend this method because any
incompatible applications are also transferred.
Note:
1. Calculate how much space your applications and information occupy on
your previous Palm OS device:
䡲
䡲
䡲
From Applications view, open the menus
Select Info on the App menu.
At the bottom of the screen, select Size.
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
.
27
Computer Connection
You can transfer all compatible applications and information from your previous
Palm OS® device to your new Treo™ 700P smart device. This includes your calendar
events, contacts, memos, and tasks, as well as your application settings and any
compatible third-party applications and files.
䡲
Look at the numbers on the Free Space line and
subtract the number on the left from the
number on the right to calculate the space used.
For example, on the device shown here, 22.4 17.5 = 4.9. This means that 4.9MB of space is
occupied on this device.
2. If the space occupied on your old device is 60MB or
less, go to step 3. If the space occupied is greater
than 60MB, then do any of the following to free up some space before you
go to the next step:
䡲 Delete any third-party applications that you no longer use.
䡲 Move large files, such as eBooks and images, to an expansion card.
䡲 Move third-party applications to an expansion card.
䡲 Purge old information in applications such as Calendar (Date Book), Tasks
(To Do), and email. Refer to the documentation that came with your old
device for instructions on these items.
3. Synchronize your old device with your old desktop software to back up your
information one last time.
4. Connect your new smart device to your computer (see “Connecting Your
Treo Device to Your Computer” on page 32).
5. Install the new desktop synchronization software from the Palm Software
Installation CD (see “Installing the Desktop Synchronization Software” on
page 30).
Important:
28
Do not synchronize your new Treo 700P smart device with any previous
versions of Palm Desktop software.
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
6. During the installation process, synchronize your new Treo device with your
7. (Mac users only) If you have pictures on your old device, copy them from your
old device to an expansion card or beam them to your new Treo device.
8. If you plan to continue using your old device, perform a hard reset to
remove its associated device name. (See the documentation that came with
your old device for instructions on performing a hard reset.) Each device you
synchronize with your computer must have a unique name. The next time
you synchronize your old device with your computer, be sure to assign it a
new name.
If any third-party applications are quarantined during the installation, do not
manually install any of the quarantined files. Contact the third-party developer
for software updates and information about compatibility with your new device.
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
29
Computer Connection
new desktop synchronization software as instructed. When prompted, do
the following:
䡲 Connect your new device to your computer (see “Connecting Your Treo
Device to Your Computer” on page 32).
䡲 Indicate whether you want to sync all applications or only PIM (personal
information management) applications.
䡲 Select a device name for your new device; be sure to select the same
name that you used for your old device. (This is the name that appears
in the User list in Palm Desktop software.)
Installing the Desktop Synchronization Software
Even if you already own a Palm OS device and have installed a previous version of
the desktop software, you must install the software from the Palm Software
Installation CD that comes with your Treo 700P smart device.
Note:
If you are installing the software on a computer at work, make sure your
company allows you to install new software. Contact your company’s IT
department for help.
1. Close any applications that are currently running on your computer,
including those that are minimized. Your computer must have all its
resources available to install the software.
2. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD into the CD drive on your
computer.
30
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
3. If you are installing the software on a Mac, double-click the CD icon on the
desktop, and then double-click the PalmSoftware.pkg icon.
4. When the installation wizard opens, follow the onscreen instructions.
Please note these important points about the installation process:
䡲 You can choose which desktop software you want to use for
synchronization: Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook
(Windows only).
If you use Microsoft Outlook as your desktop email application, select
Microsoft Outlook as your desktop synchronization software. If you
select Microsoft Outlook, Palm Desktop software is still installed on your
computer. When you enter information on your computer, be sure to
enter your information in Microsoft Outlook, not in Palm Desktop
software.
䡲
Tip:
Computer Connection
Note:
When the install process prompts you to connect your device to your
computer, go to “Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer” on
page 32.
If you want to sync information with applications other than
Palm Desktop or Microsoft Outlook, you need to purchase additional
third-party sync software. This sync software is sometimes called a
conduit.
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
31
Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer
1. Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
2. Plug the USB sync cable into an available USB port or a powered USB hub on
your computer.
3. With the sync button facing up, connect the sync cable to the bottom of
your device. Do not press the sync button until you are instructed to do so.
4. Connect the charger cable to the connector on the sync cable.
Sync Button
Sync Cable
You are now ready to synchronize. Go to “Synchronizing Information—The Basics”
on page 33.
32
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
Synchronizing Information—The Basics
Synchronizing means that information that is entered or updated in one place
(your device or your computer) is automatically updated in the other, so there’s
no need to enter the information twice. We strongly recommend that you
synchronize your Treo device with your computer or corporate server frequently
to keep your information up-to-date (and backed up) in both locations.
To sync your information, you must install the software from the Palm
Software Installation CD that came with your Treo 700P smart device—
even if you sync with Outlook or another third-party application. See
“Installing the Desktop Synchronization Software” on page 30 for
instructions.
Information from all the following applications is updated by default each time
you synchronize your device with your desktop software:
Tip:
You can also set up the VersaMail® application to synchronize email on
your device with email on your computer. See the User Guide for the
VersaMail Application on the Palm Software Installation CD for
information.
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
33
Computer Connection
Important:
How each application syncs depends on your computer type and the desktop
software you are using, as follows:
Computer
Windows
Desktop
What Syncs and Where
Outlook
䢇
䢇
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and
Tasks sync with Outlook.
Pics&Videos syncs with
Palm Desktop software.
Windows
Palm Desktop software
All applications sync with
Palm Desktop.
Mac
Palm Desktop software
All applications sync with
Palm Desktop.
Tip:
For information on locating your pictures and videos on your computer,
see “Viewing Pictures and Videos on Your Computer” on page 202.
1. Connect your Treo 700P smart device to your computer as described in
“Connecting Your Treo Device to Your Computer” on page 32.
Note:
34
If you’re performing initial setup, your device should already be
connected to your computer.
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
2. Press the sync button on the sync cable.
A message indicates that synchronization is in progress.
3. Wait for a message that indicates that the process is complete before you
disconnect the sync cable.
Tip:
If you have any problems synchronizing, see “Synchronization” on
page 321 for troubleshooting suggestions.
If you’re finishing your initial setup, you now have the option to install bonus
software from the Palm Software Installation CD. If you choose to install some of
the bonus software, you need to sync again to install the software on your device.
To install bonus software later, see “Installing Bonus Software From the CD” on
page 255.
Note:
For more synchronization options, including customizing which
applications sync, see “Synchronizing Information—Advanced” on
page 268.
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
35
Computer Connection
Sync
Button
36
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
Section 2
Your Treo™ 700P Smart Device
38
S e c ti o n 2 A
Moving Around on Your Smart Device
In This Section
⽧
Moving Around the Device Screen
⽧
Using the Keyboard
⽧
Opening Applications
Moving Around
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device
39
Moving Around the Device Screen
To move around the Treo™ 700P smart device screen, you can use the
5-way navigator
for one-handed navigation, or you can tap items on the
screen with the stylus. With use, you will find your own favorite way to scroll,
highlight, and select menu items.
Note:
The 5-way
Some third-party applications may not work with the 5-way navigator, and
you must use the stylus instead. In this guide, arrow icons are used to indicate
directions on the 5-way navigator. These arrows are different from any
onscreen scroll arrows or pick list arrows.
includes Right
, Left
, Up
, Down
, and Center
buttons.
Up
Center
Left
Right
Down
40
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device
Scrolling Through Screens
As on a computer, you scroll on the Treo device to move from field to field or page
to page, or in some cases to highlight an item or option in a list.
The behavior of the 5-way
for list screens and entry screens varies by
application. Here are some general scrolling tips that apply to most applications:
䢇
Press Right , Left , Up , and Down
on the 5-way
next field, button, or action in that direction.
䢇
In list screens, press and hold Up
䢇
Press Option
and Up
or Down
to scroll
to the next page of information within the
current record (see “Using the Keyboard” on
page 45).
䢇
When inside a text field, press Right or Left
to scroll to the next character or word, and
press Up
or Down
to scroll between lines.
or Down
to scroll one screen at a time.
Scroll Arrows
Moving Around
You can also scroll using the stylus. Tap an onscreen
scroll arrow, or drag the slider of an onscreen scroll
bar.
to move to the
Scroll Bar
Highlighting and Selecting Items
On most screens, one item—a button, a list entry, or a check box—is highlighted
by default. The highlight identifies which item is affected by your next action.
Use the 5-way
to move the highlight from one item to another before
opening or selecting it.
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device
41
The highlight can take one of two forms, depending on what is highlighted:
䢇 Border glow: When an onscreen button (OK, Cancel, etc.) or
pick list is highlighted, the button acquires a glow around
its border.
䢇 Colored background: When a phone number, text, an
email address, or a Web link is highlighted, the item
appears as white text against a colored background.
After highlighting an item, you can select or activate it by pressing Center
by tapping the item with the stylus.
or
Highlighting Text
You can use the stylus to highlight text on the screen.
䢇 Tap and drag the stylus across the text you want to highlight.
䢇 To highlight a word, double-tap it.
䢇 To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.
Accessing Command Buttons
In most applications, command buttons such as New, OK, and Details appear at
the bottom of the screen. In many cases, you can jump directly to these buttons
instead of scrolling to them. The 5-way
controls vary according to the
application, but here are some general rules that apply to most applications:
䢇
䢇
42
From a list screen, such as the Contacts list or Memos list, press Right or
Down
to jump to the first button.
From a screen where you create or edit entries, such as Edit Contacts, press
to jump to the first button.
Center
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device
䢇
From a dialog box, such as Edit Categories, press Up
Left
, Down
,Right
or
to scroll to the buttons.
Selecting Menu Items
Many applications have menus to provide access to
additional features. These menus are usually hidden
from view, but they appear when you open the
menus
. To get the most out of your Treo device,
it’s a good idea to familiarize yourself with the
additional features available through the various
application menus.
1. Press Menu
2. Press Right
to open an application’s menus.
and Left
to switch between
Menu Shortcut
3. Press Up
and Down
to highlight a menu item.
4. Press Center
to select the menu item, or press Menu
menus and cancel your selection.
Tip:
Moving Around
menus.
to close the
Most menu items have menu shortcuts listed in the menu. To use a menu
shortcut, press Menu plus the shortcut letter. You don’t have to see the menu
item to use the menu shortcut. For example, when you’re in Calendar, you can
press Menu + N to create a new event.
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device
43
Selecting Options in a Pick List
A range of options is often presented in a type of menu called a pick list, which
can be identified by a downward-pointing arrow. Pick lists are different from the
application menus previously described. The application menus give you access
to additional features, and pick lists enable you to select the contents for a
particular field.
You can select an option from a pick list with the 5-way
䢇
Use the 5-way
to highlight the pick list, and then press Center
to
display the items in the list. Press Up
and Down
to highlight the item
you want, and then press Center
䢇
44
or the stylus:
to select the highlighted item. To exit
the pick list without making a selection, press Left or Right .
Use your stylus to tap the pick list, and then tap the item you want from
the list. To exit the pick list without making a selection, tap outside the list.
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device
Using the Keyboard
When using the keyboard, most people find it easiest to hold the Treo device with
two hands and use the tips of both thumbs to press the keys.
Backlight
Backspace
Option
Return
Moving Around
Menu
Shift/Find
Space
Alt
The Backspace, Return, Space, and Shift keys, as well as the letter keys, work in the
same way as do those found on any computer keyboard. In addition, your device
offers several special function keys.
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device
45
Key
Function
Option
When pressed in conjunction with a second key, gives that key an
alternate function. For example:
䢇 Option + <any lettered key> enters the symbol or number
displayed at the top of the key.
䢇 Option + <any quick button> opens a secondary application (see
“Using the Quick Buttons” on page 50).
䢇 Option + Shift/Find opens the Find feature (see “Using Find” on
page 254).
䢇 Option + Menu dims the device screen.
Alt
When pressed in conjunction with a second key, displays a variety of
alternate characters that can be entered using that key. See “Entering
Other Symbols and Accented Characters” on page 48 for details.
Menu
Opens application menus. See “Selecting Menu Items” on page 43 for
details.
Tip:
46
The Treo device includes a keyboard backlight that turns on and off when the
screen turns on or off. Press Option + P to adjust screen and keyboard backlight
brightness. The backlight also dims when an active call lasts longer than a
specified period of time. See “Optimizing Power Settings” on page 296 to
adjust the automatic shut-off and dimming intervals.
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device
Entering Lowercase and Uppercase Letters
䢇
To enter lowercase letters, press the desired keys.
䢇
To enter an uppercase letter, press Shift/Find
, and then press a letter key.
You don’t need to press and hold Shift/Find
while entering uppercase
letters. When Shift is active, an up arrow appears in the lower-right corner
of the screen.
䢇
To turn Caps Lock on, press Shift/Find
twice. To turn it off, press Shift/Find
once. When Caps Lock is on, an underlined up arrow
lower-right corner of the screen.
appears in the
Entering Numbers, Punctuation, and Symbols
䢇
Symbol
Letter
Press Option , and then press the key with the
desired character shown above the letter. You don’t need to press and hold
Option
while pressing the second key. When Option is active, the symbol
appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.
䢇
To turn Option Lock on, press Option
twice. To turn it off, press Option
once. When Option Lock is on, the symbol
corner of the screen.
Tip:
appears in the lower-right
Some application views automatically default to Option Lock, such as the Dial
Pad view of the Phone application, or the Calculator. In this case, you do not
need to press Option to enter numbers.
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device
47
Moving Around
Numbers, punctuation, and symbols appear above the
letters on the keys. To enter these characters, do one of
the following:
Entering Other Symbols and Accented Characters
Symbols and accented characters that do not appear on the keyboard are
sometimes called alternate characters because you use the Alt
key to enter
them.
1. Enter the character that corresponds to the symbol or accented character
you want. (See the table on the next page.)
2. Press Alt
3. Press Up
.
, Down
4. Press Center
Tip:
48
, Right
, or Left
to highlight the desired character.
to insert the character.
To see a list of additional alternate characters, position the cursor at the
beginning of the line or after a space, and then press Alt. The alternate
characters are grouped by their similarity to the base key. For example, the
alternate characters available for the e key are é, è, ë, and ê.
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device
Symbols and Accented Characters
Enter …
Then press
select …
to
Enter …
Then press
select …
to
a
á à ä â ã åæ
S
ߊ
A
ÁÀÄÂÃÅÆ
t or T
™
b or B
ß
u
úùü û
c
碩
U
ÙÚÜÛ
C
Ç¢©
x or X
× ¤
e
èéëê
y
ýÿ
E
ÈÉËÊ
Y
ÝŸ
i
ìíïî
I
ÌÍÏÎ
0123456
789.,‘“@
+ - * / # ( or )
}<>«»©®™^Ø|
l or L
£
!
¡
n
ñ
?
¿
N
Ñ
:
; :-) :-( ;-)
o
ò ó ö ôœõ
$
£¥ ¢
O
Ò Ó Ö Ô ŒÕ
p or P
¶
r or R
®
s
ßš
;_•\%=
°÷
£¥¢[]{
Moving Around
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device
§
49
Opening Applications
When you open an application using either a quick button or Applications view,
you automatically close the application you were previously using.
Using the Quick Buttons
The front of the Treo 700P smart device has three buttons that you can use to
open applications. The fourth button opens Applications view, which allows you
to open all the applications on your device (see “Using Applications View” on
page 52).
Phone
Applications
Calendar
Messaging
Each of the three application quick buttons can be used to open two applications.
To access a button’s primary application—as indicated by the graphic on the
button—simply press the button. To access a button’s secondary application,
press Option
Note:
50
, and then press the quick button.
Pressing any of the quick buttons or the Applications button automatically
wakes up your device screen. See “Waking Up the Screen” on page 54.
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device
Button
Primary Application
Secondary Application
Phone
+
Web
Calendar
+
Memos
Messaging
+
Email
Pressing Option + Applications dims your device screen.
Note:
The Messaging button opens Sprint PCS Business ConnectionSM if you have
downloaded and installed this application on your device. See “Sprint PCS
Business ConnectionSM” on page 142 for information on using this application.
You can also customize the buttons yourself. See “Customizing Device
Buttons” on page 292 for details.
Moving Around
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device
51
Using Applications View
You can access all available applications through Applications view.
1. Press Applications
.
2. Use the 5-way navigator
to highlight the
application you want to open.
3. Press Center
to open the selected application.
In Applications view, you can also do any of the following:
䢇
䢇
52
Press Applications
repeatedly to cycle through
various categories of applications. See “Changing the Applications Settings”
on page 290 for more information on categories.
Enter the first few letters of the application’s name to highlight it. For
example, if you enter “p,” it highlights Phone; if you then enter “r,”
it highlights Prefs. If you pause and then enter “r,” it highlights the first
application that starts with “r.”
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Smart Device
S e c ti o n 2 B
Using Your Device’s Phone Features
In This Section
Turning Your Device On and Off
⽧
Opening the Phone Application
⽧
Making Calls
⽧
Receiving Calls
⽧
Using Voicemail
⽧
Managing Active Calls
⽧
Using Sprint PCS® Voice Command
⽧
Defining Favorite Buttons
⽧
Using a Phone Headset
⽧
Customizing Phone Settings
⽧
Controlling Your Roaming Experience
⽧
Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Phone Features
⽧
53
Turning Your Device On and Off
Note:
Throughout this guide the term device is used to describe your Treo smart
device and its physical aspects. The term phone is used to describe the
feature of your smart device that enables you to connect to the Nationwide
Sprint PCS® Network.
You can turn on your device screen and your phone independently. For example,
the device screen can be off while the phone is on, or the device screen can be on
while the phone is off. You can also have both the device screen and the phone
turned on or off at the same time.
Waking Up the Screen
When your device screen is off, you need to wake up the screen.
1. Press and release Power/End
to wake up the screen.
Power/End
Center
2. Press Center
to turn off Keyguard. For more information about turning
Keyguard on and off, see “Locking Your Keyboard (Keyguard)” on page 297.
3. Press and release Power/End
54
to turn off the screen.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Note:
You can also press any of the application quick buttons on the front of your
device to wake up the screen and to go directly to the application associated
with that button.
Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off
When your phone is on, it is connected to the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network
(provided you are in a coverage area) so that you can make and receive phone
calls and use wireless services, such as email, messaging, and the Web browser.
During initial setup, your phone is on by default, so you can use wireless services
right away.
If you turn off your phone, you can still use the organizer features such as
Contacts and Calendar, as well as the media features such as the Pocket Tunes™
music application and Pics&Videos. This is sometimes referred to as flight mode
and is ideal for using your device on airplanes and for maximizing battery life.
1. Wake up the screen.
2. Press and hold Power/End
. (You will hear a series of ascending tones
and see a “Welcome” screen. When your device locates a signal, “Sprint”
3. Press and hold Power/End
again to turn off your phone. (You will hear
a series of descending tones and see a “Powering off” screen. When your
phone is off, “Phone Off” appears at the top of the Phone application screen.
You can still use the nonwireless features of your device, such as Contacts,
Calendar, Tasks, and Memos.)
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
55
Phone Features
and the signal-strength icon
appear at the top of the Phone application
screen, indicating that you can use the phone and Internet features, if they
are supported by the local network.)
Opening the Phone Application
䊳
Press Phone
to open the Main view of the Phone application.
Status Icons
Dial Pad
Favorite Buttons
56
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Making Calls
Your Treo™ 700P smart device offers several options for making phone calls. As
you become familiar with your device, you’ll discover which method you prefer.
Dialing Using the Onscreen Dial Pad
1. Press Phone
.
2. Enter the phone numbers by tapping the
onscreen Dial Pad with the stylus.
3. Tap Dial, press Talk
, or press Center
to dial.
If you changed the wallpaper in the Main view of the Phone application
(see “Customizing the Main View in the Phone Application” on page 92),
you can still access the Dial Pad. From the Main view of the Phone
application, press Talk and then select Dial Pad.
Tip:
You can paste numbers directly into Main view. Copy a number from
another application, and then press Phone to switch to Main view.
Open the Edit menu, and then select Paste. Press Talk to dial.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Phone Features
Note:
57
Dialing With the Keyboard
1. Press Phone
.
2. Press the numbered keys to enter the
phone number. (You don’t need to press
Option
.)
3. Press Talk
to dial.
Dialing by Contact Name
Before you can dial a call by contact name, you must create some contacts (see
“Adding a Contact” on page 220), or import them by synchronizing (see
“Synchronizing Information—The Basics” on page 33).
1. Press Phone
.
2. Select the Contacts favorite button.
Characters you enter
appear here
3. Using the keyboard, start entering one of the
following for the contact you want to call:
䡲 First name (JOH for John).
䡲 Last name (SMI for Smith).
䡲 First initial and last name (JSM for John
Smith).
For example, entering SM might display Smila
Anderson, John Smith, and Sally Martin. Entering
JSM finds only John Smith.
4. Select the number you want to call, and press Talk
58
to dial.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Tip:
To see more information for a contact, highlight the name and press
Center on the 5-way. To restart your search, press Backspace to delete
letters you’ve entered, or select Cancel to return to Main view.
Dialing With a Speed-Dial Favorite Button
Your device comes with a few predefined speed-dial
favorite buttons, but you can also create your own
favorites. See “Creating a Speed-Dial Favorite Button”
on page 79.
1. Press Phone
.
2. Press Down
to access your favorite buttons.
3. Use the 5-way
to highlight the desired
speed-dial favorite button. Speed-dial favorite buttons are indicated by the
icon
.
4. Press Center
Phone Features
Tip:
to dial the number associated with the selected button.
To view more favorite buttons, press Right or Down on the 5-way. If the
highlighted favorite was added from Contacts, press Space to view all
numbers associated with that contact.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
59
Dialing From a Web Page or Message
Your Treo device recognizes most phone numbers that
appear on Web pages or in text, email, or Sprint PCS®
Picture Mail messages. If you can’t use the 5-way or stylus
to highlight and dial a phone number on a Web page or in
a message, it means that your device doesn’t recognize
the number as a phone number.
1. Select the phone number on the Web page or in the
message.
2. Press Center
to open the Dial Number dialog box.
3. Select Dial to dial the number.
60
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Redialing a Recently Called Number
䊳
From the Main view in the Phone application, press and hold Talk
to
dial the last number you called.
–or–
To select from your most recently dialed numbers, from the Main view in the
Phone application, press Talk
to open the Redial list, select the number
you want to call, and then press Talk
again to dial.
–or–
To select from a chronological list of calls, select the Call Log favorite button.
You can also access the Call Log from the Main view in the Phone application
by pressing Talk
and selecting Call Log from the Redial list.
Phone Features
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
61
Receiving Calls
To receive calls, your device’s phone must be on. This is different from having only
the screen turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off” on page 55).
When your phone is off, your calls go to voicemail.
Answering Calls
䊳
Press Talk
–or–
.
Using the 5-way
, select the onscreen Answer button.
–or–
If the headset is attached, press the headset button.
Tip:
To prevent calls from accidentally being answered while the device is in a
pocket or briefcase, you can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature
when an incoming call arrives (see “Locking Your Screen” on page 299).
Sending Calls to Voicemail
䊳
Press Power/End
–or–
Using the 5-way
䊳
62
.
, select the onscreen Ignore button.
Using the 5-way
, select the onscreen Ignore with Text button. This
option sends the call to voicemail and opens a text message addressed to
the caller.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Tip:
Do not press Power/End to ignore a call waiting alert; this hangs up your
active call (the call waiting alert then changes to an incoming call alert).
Use the 5-way method instead.
Silencing the Ring of an Incoming Call
䊳
Press any key on your device except Talk
, Power/End
, or the 5-way
.
–or–
To immediately silence all system sounds including the ringer, slide the
Ringer switch to Sound Off
(see “Silencing Sounds” on page 284).
If music is playing and a call arrives, the phone rings softly and the music
automatically pauses. The music resumes if you ignore the call or, if you answer
the call, the music resumes when you hang up.
Phone Features
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
63
Using Voicemail
Setting Up Your Voicemail
Your voicemail number is preset when you activate your device. The first time you
call voicemail, you are prompted to enter your voicemail password. If necessary,
please contact Sprint for your password and enter it as prompted.
1. Make sure your phone is turned on (see “Turning
Your Device’s Phone On and Off” on page 55).
2. Press Phone
.
3. Select the Voicemail favorite button to dial the
automated voicemail system.
4. Follow the voice prompts to set up your voicemail.
Tip:
You can also press and hold 1 to dial voicemail from the Dial Pad and
Favorites.
Voicemail Notification
When you have a new voicemail message, you are
notified with an Alert screen. To respond to the Alert
screen, select OK to dismiss the alert or select Listen to
play the message. When you have messages that you
have not listened to, the Voicemail icon
also
appears in the title bar at the top of the Main view in
the Phone application.
64
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages
1. Press Phone
.
2. Press and hold 1 to dial the voicemail system, or select the Voicemail favorite
button.
3. Enter your voicemail password by using the keyboard, or select Extra Digits if
you defined this option (see “Defining Favorite Buttons” on page 78 for
details on defining extra digits). Remember that you do not need to press
Option
to enter numbers, an asterisk (*), or a pound sign (#) while on an
active call.
Tip:
If the Voicemail icon appears in the title bar of the Main view of the
Phone application, you can select this icon to retrieve your voicemail.
Phone Features
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
65
Accessing Your Voicemail From Another Phone
1. Dial your wireless phone number.
2. Press * (Option
+ Z) when your voicemail answers.
3. Enter your password, and then press # (Option
+ B).
Displaying Numeric Pages
If an incoming call goes to voicemail, the caller can choose to enter their phone
number as a numeric page instead of leaving a voicemail message. When
someone pages you, the page is displayed on the Alert screen. If there is just one
alert, the icon is a phone with a bubble on it
icon is a messaging icon
. If there are multiple alerts, the
.
1. From the Alert screen, highlight an item with an alert icon.
2. Select Go To to view the page in the Messaging application. The page
displays the caller’s phone number.
66
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Managing Active Calls
When you make or receive a call, Active Call view appears. Use the 5-way navigator
to access the onscreen buttons in this view.
Current Duration
of Call
Caller’s Name
and Number
Dial Pad
Mute
The onscreen buttons in Active Call view perform the following functions:
Ends the call immediately. You can also press the headset button (if the headset
is attached).
Phone Features
Turns on the speakerphone. When the speakerphone is on, you can take the
device away from your ear and use other features during a call. For example, you
can check your calendar or look up contact information.
Turns off the speakerphone when it is on.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
67
Replaces the Spkr-phone button when a Bluetooth® hands-free device such as a
headset or car kit is attached. Select this button to transfer the call from the
Bluetooth hands-free device to the built-in earpiece.
Places the current call on hold.
Enables you to place another call while the first call is on hold. For information
on handling a second outgoing call, see “Making a Second Call” on page 71.
Opens the Dial Pad so you can manually dial additional numbers, such as an
extension or a response to a voice prompt.
Dials any extra digits (such as a password or an extension) that you assigned to a
favorite button. This button replaces the Dial Pad button during outgoing calls
to numbers that include predefined extra digits. See “Defining Favorite Buttons”
on page 78 for information on defining extra digits.
Mutes the microphone so that you cannot be heard.
Tip:
68
To avoid accidentally pressing onscreen buttons while holding the device
to your ear, you can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during
active calls (see “Locking Your Screen” on page 299).
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Ending a Call
Do one of the following to end a call:
䢇
䢇
䢇
Press Power/End
.
Select Hang Up All.
Press the button on the headset (if the headset is attached).
Tip:
When a call lasts longer than two minutes, the screen dims. Press any
key except Power/End to wake up the screen, and then press Power/End
to hang up the call. Be careful not to press Power/End to wake up the
screen because this will accidentally end the call.
Switching Applications During an Active Call
You can use many other applications on your device while holding a phone
conversation, including the organizer and text messaging features. You cannot,
however, make a data connection while on an active call. This means that you
cannot browse the Web or send and receive email or Picture Mail messages while
on an active call.
.
Phone Features
1. Go to Applications
2. Select the icon for the application you want to open.
3. Complete the task in the application.
4. Press Phone
Tip:
to return to Active Call view.
If you’d like to continue talking while viewing another application, select
Spkr-phone before you switch to the other application. If you’re using a
headset, you can skip this step.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
69
Saving Phone Numbers
After you complete an outgoing call to a number that is not in your Contacts list,
you are prompted to add the number to your Contacts list. You are also prompted
to add new numbers from incoming calls with caller ID.
䢇 To create a new contact entry for this number, select
Create a New Contact, and enter the contact’s
information.
䢇
䢇
䢇
To add this number to an existing contact entry,
select Add to a Contact, and then select the contact.
The number is pasted into the first available phone
number field for that contact.
To decline adding this number, select Cancel.
To disable the Add New Number prompt, check the Don’t ask me this again box.
Tip:
You can re-enable the Add New Number prompt if you’ve disabled it. In
the Phone application, open the menus and select Phone Preferences.
Check the Ask to add unknown phone numbers after calls box.
If you don’t add a number right away, follow these steps to add it later:
1. In the Call Log (see “Redialing a Recently Called Number” on page 61),
highlight the number you want to save.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Add Contact.
4. Enter the information for the entry.
5. Select Done.
70
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call while your first call is still active.
1. Dial the first number and wait until the person
answers.
2. Use the 5-way
to select Hold.
3. Use the 5-way
to select Add Call.
4. Dial the second number using any of the methods
described in “Making Calls” on page 57.
5. When the Dial another call? prompt appears,
select Yes.
Tip:
Active Call view now includes two status lines, each representing one of
the calls. You can join the two calls in a conference call by selecting Conf.
or finish the second call and return to the first call, but you cannot
switch between the two calls.
6. Press Power/End
Answering a Second Call (Call Waiting)
When you are on an active call, you can receive a second call. When the second
call comes in, you hear a call waiting tone and the Call Waiting dialog box appears.
You can do any of the following to handle the second call:
䢇 To place the current call on hold and answer the new call, press Talk
or
use the 5-way navigator
to select Answer.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
71
Phone Features
to end both calls. To return to the first call, wait for
the second call to hang up.
䢇
䢇
To send the new call to voicemail, use the 5-way
to select Ignore.
To send the new call to voicemail and send the caller a text message, use the
5-way
䢇
to select Ignore with Text.
To hang up the current call and answer the new call, press Power/End
Tip:
Once you have answered a second call, to switch back and forth
between the original call and the call you answered, use the 5-way to
select Swap.
Note:
When you answer a second call and then select the Hang Up All button,
it ends both calls. In this situation, if the first caller has not yet hung up
the phone, the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network automatically redials
your number from the first caller’s number and you see an incoming call
alert. You can answer to continue your call with the first caller.
.
Making a Conference Call Using Three-Way Calling
You can join two calls in a conference session by using three-way calling. Normal
airtime rates apply for each of the two calls.
1. When your first call is active, place a second call (see “Making a Second Call”
on page 71). (You cannot initiate a three-way call if the second call is an
incoming call.)
72
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
2. When you’re connected to the second party, use the 5-way
to select
Conf to begin your three-way call.
Note:
If one of the people you called hangs up, you and the remaining caller
stay connected. The screen does not change to indicate that one of the
callers has hung up. If you initiated the call and are the first to hang up,
all three callers are disconnected.
3. To end the three-way call, press Power/End
or select Hang Up All.
You can forward calls to another number. You can still make calls from your
device while call forwarding is activated. There is an additional per-call charge for
this service. When call forwarding is active, an icon appears in the title bar of
the Phone application’s Main view.
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
73
Phone Features
Call Forwarding
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Preferences.
4. Select the Call forwarding pick list.
䡲
䡲
If the forwarding number appears in the pick
list, select the number.
If the forwarding number does not appear in
the pick list, select Edit numbers, and then select
New. Enter a 10-digit forwarding number
without spaces, and select OK. Then select the
number from the Call forwarding pick list.
5. Select OK.
6. Call your Treo device to confirm that call forwarding is active.
Using Flash Mode During an Active Call
Flash mode provides an alternate way to manage your calls while one or more
calls are active. For example, you can dial another call, swap between active calls,
or join two calls in a conference session with the press of a button while in Flash
mode.
1. Press Talk
from Active Call view.
2. If the Do you want to switch to Flash mode?
prompt appears, select Yes.
3. While in Flash mode, do any of the following:
䡲
74
If you have one active call and you answer
an incoming second call, press Talk
to
swap between the calls.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
䡲
䡲
䡲
Note:
If you have one active call, to make an outgoing second call, dial the
number using any of the methods described in “Making Calls” on
page 57.
If you have one active call and you place an outgoing second call, press
Talk
after establishing a connection with the second party to set
up a conference session using three-way calling.
If you have two calls in conference, press Talk
to hang up one of
the calls; you can then dial another number and include the new caller
in the conference session.
Pressing Talk during a conference call usually hangs up the second call.
However, depending on your network connection, you may occasionally
hang up the first call.
4. To exit Flash mode and end all the calls, press Power/End
.
Phone Features
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
75
Using Sprint PCS® Voice Command
If you subscribe to the Sprint PCS® Voice Command service, you can call a number
by just saying a name. (There is a monthly charge for this service.)
To activate Sprint PCS Voice Command, you must speak to a Sprint Customer
Service representative:
1. Make sure your phone is turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On
and Off” on page 55).
2. Press Phone
.
3. Press * (Option
+ Z), press 2, and then press Talk
Customer Service and sign up.
to contact Sprint
Setting Up Your Personal Address Book
To use Sprint PCS Voice Command, you must first set up your personal address
book.
1. From the Main view of the Phone application, press * (Option
+ Z), and
then press Talk
. Follow the system prompts. (You’ll hear a tone,
followed by the prompt “Ready.”)
2. Say “Add Name” to begin setting up your Personal Address Book, and then
follow the voice prompts.
76
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Making a Call With Sprint PCS Voice Command
1. From the Main view of the Phone application, press * (Option
then press Talk
+ Z), and
. (You’ll hear a tone followed by the prompt “Ready.”)
2. After the prompt, say “Call” and the name you’ve assigned to the number
you want to call. (Your request will be repeated and you will be asked to
verify it.)
3. Say “Yes” to dial the call. Say “No” to cancel.
Phone Features
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
77
Defining Favorite Buttons
Your Treo device provides 70 programmable favorite
buttons for quick access to the following common tasks:
䢇 Dialing a phone number (speed dial)
䢇 Accessing your Call Log
䢇 Accessing the onscreen Dial Pad
䢇 Opening an application
䢇 Accessing a Web page
䢇 Addressing a text, email, or Picture Mail message
䢇 Accessing voicemail (preset on your Treo device)
Sprint may preset favorite buttons on your device that are customized for their
services. You can customize all favorite buttons except Voicemail—either delete
and reassign existing favorite buttons or create new ones—to perform any of the
supported tasks.
For each favorite button, you can also set up a Quick Key that gives you instant
access to the phone number or corresponding screen. Quick Keys are optional and
can be letters only, except for the Voicemail Quick Key, which is preprogrammed as
1. The letter equivalent for that key is E, so you cannot assign E as a Quick Key to
another favorite button.
Tip:
78
If you’re upgrading from a previous Treo device, your favorites might be
transferred along with your other information. However, you may need
to rearrange the order in which your favorite buttons appear by opening
the Record menu and then selecting Edit Favorites Pages.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Creating a Speed-Dial Favorite Button
1. Press Phone
.
2. Use the 5-way navigator
Tip:
to select a blank favorite button.
If there are no blank favorite buttons on the current Favorites page,
press Right on the 5-way to scroll through the other pages. If you run
out of blank favorite buttons, you can delete some existing favorites to
make room for new ones (see “Editing or Deleting an Existing Favorite
Button” on page 81).
3. Enter a label for the favorite.
䡲
䡲
If the entry is for an existing contact, select
Lookup. Start entering the contact’s last name,
and then select the number you want for the
contact when it appears in the lookup list.
If the entry is for a new contact, enter the Label,
press Down , and enter the Number.
4. (Optional) Enter a Quick Key, a letter which you can
Phone Features
press and hold from the Main, Dial Pad, or Favorites view of the Phone
application to dial this speed-dial number.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
79
5. (Optional) Select More, and then select advanced options:
䡲
䡲
Extra Digits lets you define additional digits to dial, such as a password
or extension. To enter a one-second pause, insert a comma between
digits. To add a longer pause, enter more commas.
Dial Extra Digits automatically dials predefined extra digits immediately
after dialing the phone number, when checked.
6. Select OK.
Creating Other Types of Favorite Buttons
1. Press Phone
2. Use the 5-way
.
to select a blank favorite button.
3. Select the Type pick list and select Call Log, Dial Pad, Contacts, Application,
Message, Email, or Web Link.
4. Enter a label for the favorite and enter any other necessary information on
the screen.
Tip:
When creating a Message or Email favorite you can enter multiple
addresses; simply separate each address with a comma. This is an easy
way to send messages to a group of people.
5. (Optional) Enter a Quick Key, a letter which you can press and hold from the
Main, Dial Pad, or Favorites view of the Phone application to open the
favorite.
6. Select OK.
80
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Editing or Deleting an Existing Favorite Button
You can edit or delete most favorite buttons. You cannot edit or delete the preset
Voicemail button, but you can add extra digits or move the Voicemail button to a
different position.
1. Press Phone
.
2. Use the 5-way
to access Favorites.
3. Highlight the favorite button you want to edit or delete.
4. Open the menus
.
5. Select Edit Favorites Button on the Record menu.
6. To edit the entry, make the desired changes. (For example, you can add a
Quick Key shortcut to any favorite.) To delete the entry, select Delete.
7. Select OK.
Tip:
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Phone Features
You can also organize your favorite buttons on different pages. Open the
Record menu, and then select Edit Favorites Pages. To arrange your
favorites, drag and drop the buttons into a new slot. To move a favorite
to another page, drag the button onto the page icon at the bottom of
the screen.
81
Using a Phone Headset
You can connect a phone headset for hands-free operation. If you need to use
your device while driving and this is permitted in your area, we recommend using
a phone headset (wired headset included) or a hands-free car kit (sold
separately).
In addition to the stereo headset included with your Treo device, your device is
compatible with the following types of headsets that are sold separately:
䢇 Wired headsets with a 2.5mm connector (3-pin or 4-pin)
䢇 Wireless headsets and car kits enabled with Bluetooth 1.1 or 1.2 wireless
technology
Note:
For a list of compatible hands-free devices, go to www.palm.com/us/
support/bluetooth/treo700p_bluetooth_compatibility.html.
Check the specifications for your headset or car kit to confirm compatibility.
Please note that you cannot use stereo headphones with Bluetooth wireless
technology to listen to music files.
82
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Using a Wired Headset
Microphone
Headset
Button
Speaker
Note:
Phone Features
When using the headset that is included with your device, you can press the
headset button to perform any of the following tasks:
䢇 Answer an incoming call or a call waiting call.
䢇 Pick up a call that is on hold.
䢇 Switch between an active call and a call on hold (if the second call is
incoming).
䢇 Join two calls in a conference (if the second call is outgoing).
䢇 Hang up a single call.
The headset designed for Treo™ 180, 270, and 300 devices is not
compatible with your Treo 700P smart device. Standard headsets sold
with other Sprint phones are compatible with your device. If you hear a
headset buzz or experience poor microphone performance, your headset
may be incompatible with your device.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
83
Connecting to a Bluetooth Hands-Free Device
Once you set up a partnership with a Bluetooth hands-free device such as a
headset or car kit, you can communicate with that device whenever it is powered
on and within range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in optimum environmental
conditions. Performance and range may be affected by physical obstacles, radio
interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.
Note:
In the documentation for the other device, a partnership might be
referred to by a term such as trusted pair, trusted device, or pairing.
1. Go to Applications
and select Bluetooth
or tap the Bluetooth icon
,
in the title bar.
2. Select On.
3. Enter a device name for your Treo device. This is
the name that appears on the other Bluetooth
device’s screen when it connects to your Treo
device.
4. Prepare your hands-free device to accept a connection from another
Bluetooth device. See the documentation that came with your hands-free
device for instructions.
84
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
5. Select Setup Devices.
6. Select Hands-free Setup.
7. Follow the onscreen instructions to create a
partnership with the specific hands-free device.
When prompted, enter a passkey.
Important:
Some hands-free devices may have a built-in passkey; other devices may
provide a screen where you enter the passkey. In either case, you must
use the same passkey on both your Treo device and your hands-free
device. We recommend that you use a passkey of 16 digits, where
possible, to improve the security of your Treo device. The longer the
passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. If the
hands-free device has a built-in passkey, see the device’s documentation
for the passkey.
8. After you finish setting up the device, select Done to return to Applications
You can now use your Treo device with the Bluetooth hands-free device such as a
headset or car kit.
Using a Bluetooth Hands-Free Device
If your Bluetooth hands-free device is turned on and within range (up to 30 feet
in ideal conditions), the Treo device automatically routes all calls to the handsfree device instead of to the Treo device’s earpiece. When a call comes in, your
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
85
Phone Features
view.
device rings and the hands-free device beeps. Even if you answer the call on your
Treo device, the call goes to the hands-free device.
The features available on your hands-free device vary by model. Check the
documentation for your hands-free device for details on the supported features
and how to use those features. Your Treo device can support the following
features, provided that your hands-free device also supports them:
䢇 Answer an incoming call.
䢇 Answer a call waiting call.
䢇 Switch between an active call and a call on hold (if the second call is
incoming).
䢇 Hang up a single call.
䢇 Transfer an outgoing call from the Treo device’s earpiece to the hands-free
device.
䢇 Ignore an incoming call.
䢇 Redial the last number you called from the hands-free device.
䢇 View a log of recently received, missed, and dialed calls, and dial numbers for
these calls directly from the hands-free device.
䢇 Transfer speed-dial favorites and Contacts entries containing phone numbers
from your Treo device to the hands-free device phone book, up to the
maximum number of entries allowed in your hands-free device’s phone book.
Tip:
86
Your Treo device transfers speed-dial favorites first, and then contacts in
alphabetical order up to the maximum number of entries allowed in
your hands-free device’s phone book. So if you have important numbers
that you want to show up in your hands-free device’s phone book, be
sure to create speed-dial favorites for them before you transfer the
numbers.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Setting Up Your Hands-Free Device to Automatically Answer Calls
You can set your Bluetooth hands-free device to automatically answer incoming
calls, provided that your device supports this feature.
1. Go to Applications
and select Prefs
.
2. Select Handsfree.
3. Select the Auto answer pick list and select whether you want your handsfree device to automatically answer incoming calls, and how quickly you
want it to answer.
4. Select Done.
Phone Features
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
87
Customizing Phone Settings
Selecting Ringtones
You can set various tones for various types of incoming phone calls.
Tip:
You can download any compatible ringtone directly to your device (see
“Downloading Files From a Web Page” on page 163). You can also
download ringtones to your computer and then email them to your
device.
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences.
4. Select the Application pick list, and then select Ring
Tones.
5. Select the Volume pick list, and then select the
volume level.
6. Select the Vibrate pick list, and then select when you want the vibrate
option to turn on.
7. (Optional) Check the Escalate ring tone volume box if you want the ring to
play softly and then increase to full volume the longer it rings.
8. Select ringtones from the following pick lists:
䡲
88
Known Caller for an incoming call from someone in your Contacts
or Favorites.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
䡲
䡲
Unknown Caller for an incoming call from someone identified by caller
ID who is not in your Contacts or Favorites.
Roaming for incoming calls when you’re outside the Nationwide
Sprint PCS Network.
9. Select Done.
Tip:
You can also preview, delete, and send sounds on your device. Go to
Applications, select Sound Preferences, and then select Manage. To play
a sound, select it, and then press Center on the 5-way. To delete a sound,
select it, and then press Backspace. To send a sound, select it, and then
select Talk.
Selecting Phone Alert Tones
You can set various tones for various types of alerts.
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences.
Phone Features
4. Select the Application pick list, and then select Phone
Alerts.
5. Select the Volume pick list, and then select the
volume level.
6. Select the Vibrate pick list, and then select when you want the vibrate
option to turn on.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
89
7. Select options for when an alert should sound:
䡲
䡲
䡲
Voicemail Alert to indicate when a new voicemail message has arrived.
Coverage in/out to indicate if you’ve moved in or out of a coverage area.
Signal faded to indicate if the network signal lost strength or
disappeared and a call was dropped.
8. Select Done.
Adjusting Call Volume
䊳
While a call is in progress, press the Volume button on the side of your
device to adjust the call volume.
Volume Button
Side Button
Adjusting Ringer Volume
䊳
90
When you are not on a call, press the Volume button on the side of your
device to adjust the ringer volume, and then press the Side button to
confirm the change.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Assigning a Caller ID Picture
1. Press Phone
.
2. Select the Contacts favorite button.
3. Open the contact entry to which you want to give a
caller ID picture, and then select Edit.
4. Select the Picture box and do one of the following:
䡲
䡲
Select Camera to take a picture and add it to this
contact entry when you save the picture (if your
device includes a camera).
Select Photos and select an existing picture that you want to assign to
this contact.
5. Select Done.
Assigning a Caller ID Ringtone
Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is calling before you even look at your
device. This is a great way to keep track of calls from important people in your life
and to screen calls you’d prefer not to answer.
Phone Features
1. Press Phone
.
2. Select the Contacts favorite button.
3. Open the contact entry to which you want to give a
caller ID ringtone, and then select Edit.
4. Select the Ringtone pick list and select a ringtone for
this contact.
5. Select Done.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
91
Tip:
You can assign a ringtone to an entire category of contacts. For example,
use a special ringtone for categories such as Family, Work, or Golf
Buddies. Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner, select Edit
Categories, and then select the category. Select the ringtone on the Edit
Category screen.
Customizing the Main View in the Phone Application
Phone Display Options let you customize the appearance and text entry mode of
the Main view in the Phone application.
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Display Options.
4. Set any of the following options:
䡲
䡲
Tip:
92
Show … sets whether the Dial Pad or
wallpaper appears in the Main view of the
Phone application. If you select Show
Wallpaper, select the thumbnail image and
then select an image to use as wallpaper.
Typing … sets whether typing enters numbers
in the Dial Pad or starts a contact search.
If you choose to have typing start a contact search, you need to press
Option to enter a number when dialing from the Dial Pad.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
䡲
䡲
䡲
Show Calendar event: Sets whether the current event from the Calendar
application appears in the Main view of the Phone application. When
this option is enabled, you can then select this event to jump to the
Calendar application.
Show Favorite buttons: Sets whether Favorites appear in the Main view of
the Phone application.
Rows: Sets the number of favorite button rows that appear in the Main
view of the Phone application.
5. Select OK.
Setting Your Dialing Preferences
Dialing preferences let you add a prefix to your phone numbers. For example, you
can automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit phone numbers you enter from
Contacts. You can also add a different prefix based on the length of the phone
number.
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Phone Features
3. Select Options, and then select Dial Preferences.
93
4. Set any one or more of the following options:
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
Dialing from North America: Formats phone
numbers using North American conventions
(XXX-XXX-XXXX).
Always dial 1 in front of the area code: Adds a 1 in
front of 10-digit phone numbers you dial from
Contacts (see “Dialing by Contact Name” on
page 58). A 1 is not automatically entered if you
dial using the keyboard or the Dial Pad. This
option is available only when Dialing from North
America is enabled.
International Prefix: Adds the specified prefix in front of international
phone numbers; in the U.S. and Canada, this prefix is 011. When you
dial, the plus symbol (+) preceding the phone number is replaced by this
prefix.
To 7 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to 7-digit numbers. For example, enter
your own area code to automatically add your area when you dial local
numbers.
To 6/5/4 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to numbers with the specified
number of digits. For example, if all the phone numbers in your office
begin with 555, followed by a 4-digit extension, you can select 4 and
enter 555 as the prefix. When you want to call a colleague, simply enter
the colleague’s 4-digit extension. Your device automatically dials 555
plus the 4-digit extension. You can also create contact entries with just
the extension number and then dial the number from your Contacts list.
5. Select OK.
94
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Setting Phone Preferences
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Preferences.
4. Select any one or more of the following preferences:
䡲
Note:
Location ON allows the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network to determine
your longitude and latitude position at any time in order to provide
location-specific services. 911 Only restricts your location information to
emergency services only.
Your device is equipped with a location feature for use in connection
with location-based services that may be available in the future.
Currently the location information is used to help identify your
longitude and latitude position during an emergency call in areas where
E-911 service is available. For your safety, your location information will
always be provided during a 911 emergency call regardless of whether
you select this setting.
Short DTMF Tones lets you choose to send DTMF
tones (a certain type of touch-tone dialing tone)
stored as Extra Digits as rapid tones (see
“Defining Favorite Buttons” on page 78 for
information on defining extra digits).
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Phone Features
䡲
95
Note:
Some older answering machine systems may not recognize short tones.
䡲
䡲
䡲
Clear Voicemail Icon lets you manually reset the Voicemail icon if it
continues to appear in the Phone application title bar even after you
have listened to all your voicemail.
TTY/TDD enables you to use your device’s phone if you are hearing
impaired. Select Default Mode to send and receive text. Select VCO Mode
(Voice Carry Over) to send voice and receive text. Select HCO Mode
(Hearing Carry Over) to send text and receive voice. See the following
section, “TTY Use With Sprint PCS Service,” for more information.
Ask to add unknown phone numbers after calls displays a prompt asking
whether you would like to add the unknown phone number to your
Contacts list when you complete a call.
5. Select OK.
TTY Use With Sprint PCS Service
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a telecommunications device
that allows people who are deaf or hard of hearing, or who have speech or
language disabilities, to communicate by telephone.
Your device is compatible with select TTY devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD
machine, headset, or hands-free kit to your device through the headset jack while
this mode is enabled. Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device for
connectivity information and to ensure that the TTY device supports digital
wireless transmission.
96
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
When establishing your Sprint PCS Service, please call Sprint Customer Service via
the state Telecommunications Relay Service (TRS) by first pressing 711 , and then
pressing Talk
. Then provide the state TRS with this number: 866-727-4889.
WARNING
911 Emergency Calling
Sprint recommends that TTY users make emergency calls by other
means, including Telecommunications Relay Services (TRS), analog
cellular, and landline communications. Wireless TTY calls to 911 may be
corrupted when received by public safety answering points (PSAPs),
rendering some communications unintelligible. The problem
encountered appears related to TTY equipment or software used by
PSAPs. This matter has been brought to the attention of the FCC, and the
wireless industry and PSAP community are currently working to resolve
this.
Phone Features
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
97
Controlling Your Roaming Experience
Your device is digital dual-band, which means you can make and receive calls
while on the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network and you can also roam on other
digital networks where Sprint has implemented roaming agreements with other
carriers.
When you roam outside the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network, the Roaming icon
appears at the top of the screen. Additional charges may apply if you use your
Treo 700P smart device while roaming.
To learn more about roaming, visit www.sprint.com.
Feature Availability
䢇
䢇
䢇
You can make and receive calls while roaming.
You can access voicemail while roaming.
Other features that are standard on the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network, such
as call waiting, Sprint PCS Voice Command, and Sprint PCS Vision or Sprint
Power Vision, may be available depending upon your roaming network.
Setting Roaming Preferences
Use Roaming Preferences to set specific options for using your phone while
roaming. For example, you can set options to be notified that you are roaming
before placing a call or making a data connection, so that you are aware that you
might incur extra charges.
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
98
.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
3. Select Options, and then select Roaming Preferences.
4. Select the Network Selection pick list and select the networks with which
you want to allow your phone to make a connection:
䡲 Allow roaming enables your phone to determine the best network—
either home or roaming—with which to connect.
䡲 Home networks only allows your phone to connect only to your home
networks.
䡲 Roaming networks only allows your phone to
connect to roaming networks only.
5. Check the boxes to enable either or both of the
following roaming warning options:
䡲 Before outgoing calls causes an alert to appear,
warning you that you are on a roaming network
when you attempt to dial an outgoing call.
䡲 Before data connections causes an alert to
appear, warning you that you are on a roaming network when you
attempt to make a data connection, for example, to browse the Web.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Phone Features
6. Select OK.
99
Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status
You can monitor the status of your device’s signal strength and several other
items, using icons in the title bar of the Phone application.
Sprint
Your phone is on and you’re inside the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network. If
you are outside a coverage area, No Service or Roaming appears instead.
No Service means that there is no coverage at all and Roaming means
that another wireless service provider’s network is available. When
you turn off your phone, Phone Off appears.
Your phone is on and is connected to the Sprint PCS Vision® (1xRTT) data
network. When the arrows are green, data is being transferred (for
example, when you are opening a Web page) and you cannot receive
calls. When the arrows are gray, you are connected to the network but
data is not currently being transferred (for example, when you are
viewing a Web page that is completely open), and you can receive calls.
or
Your phone is on and is connected to the high-speed Sprint Power Vision
data network. When the triangles are blue, data is being transferred (for
example, when you are opening a Web page); when the triangles are gray,
you are connected to the network but data is not currently being
transferred (for example, when you are viewing a Web page that is
completely open). In either state, you can receive incoming calls.
Your phone is on and you are within range of a Sprint PCS Vision or highspeed Sprint Power Vision data network, but you do not have an active
data connection. You can receive incoming calls.
The Location ON option has been selected. The icon appears with a red
slash when the 911 only option has been selected. See “Setting Phone
Preferences” on page 95 for information.
100
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Appears when call forwarding is active.
TTY/TDD mode is active. Use this mode to communicate by telephone if
you are deaf or hard of hearing or if you have speech or language
disabilities.
You have new voicemail messages. You can select this icon to retrieve
your messages.
You have a new alert, such as a Calendar alarm or a new text message. To
view the alert, press and hold Center
or select the icon. See
“Viewing and Using the Alert Screen” on page 103 for more information.
Roaming is active.
Bluetooth® wireless technology is off. The icon appears in blue when
Bluetooth wireless technology is on and appears in reverse blue when
your device is communicating with other devices using Bluetooth
wireless technology. To quickly access the Bluetooth Preferences screen,
tap the Bluetooth icon.
Phone Features
Your device is connected to a headset that is enabled with Bluetooth
wireless technology. This icon replaces the Bluetooth icon; it appears in
light blue when you are not on an active call and in dark blue when you
are on an active call.
Replaces the Bluetooth icon when a dial-up networking connection using
Bluetooth wireless technology is active.
Your battery is partially drained. When the battery drains to 20% of its
capacity, the icon changes from blue to red. At 10% of its capacity, you
begin to receive warning messages, and at 5% of its capacity, the device
position) and the icon
beeps (if the Ringer switch is in the Sound On
changes from red to clear.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
101
Your battery is charging. The lightning bolt turns from red to green when
the battery is fully charged and your device remains connected to the AC
charger.
Your battery is fully charged, and your device is not connected to the
charger.
You have new text or Picture Mail messages. The number next to the icon
indicates the number of unread messages in your Inbox. Select this icon
to view your messages.
You have new email messages. The number next to the icon indicates the
number of unread messages in your Inbox; if you have set up multiple
email accounts on your device, the number reflects the account that was
most recently accessed. Select this icon to view your messages.
Displays the current (or next) event from the Calendar application. If you
have an event conflict during the current time period, a red bar appears
next to the event description. To jump to the current event in the
Calendar application, select the Calendar status line (see “Displaying Your
Calendar” on page 224 for details).
Tip:
102
To display the remaining battery power, tap the battery icon at the top of
the screen.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Viewing and Using the Alert Screen
The Alert screen on your device shows information about incoming items such as
new email messages and Calendar events. The Alert screen also notifies you if you
miss a phone call.
䊳
To view the Alert screen, select the blinking bell
when it appears in the
upper-left corner of any screen, or press and hold Center
blinking bell appears.
Note:
when the
Your device’s indicator light blinks green when you have a new alert. This
way, you can be aware of new alerts even if the screen is off.
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
103
Phone Features
You can do any of the following:
䢇 Check the box to clear an alert from the list.
䢇 Select the alert to open the corresponding application
and view the alert item (message, event, missed call,
and so on).
䢇 Select Done to close the Alert screen and return to
whatever you were doing on your device before you
opened the Alert screen. The bell continues to blink in
the upper-left corner of the screen.
䢇 Select Snooze to temporarily close the Alert screen and return to whatever you
were doing on your device before you opened the Alert screen. The screen
reappears every five minutes until you select one of the other options.
䢇 Select Clear All to delete all alerts on the Alert screen.
104
Section 2B: Using Your Device’s Phone Features
Section 3
Using Sprint PCS Vision® and Other
Wireless Connections
106
S e c ti o n 3 A
Sprint PCS Vision®—The Basics
In This Section
⽧
Getting Started With Sprint PCS Vision
⽧
Sprint Power Vision Features
⽧
Accessing Sprint PCS Vision
107
Sprint PCS Vision
Section 3A: Sprint PCS Vision®—The Basics
Getting Started With Sprint PCS Vision
Sprint PCS Vision provides wireless access to the Internet anywhere on the
Nationwide Sprint PCS® Network. To sign up for Sprint PCS Vision services or to
access complete instructions, visit www.sprint.com. For information on charges
associated with features that use a Sprint PCS Vision connection, refer to your
Sprint PCS Service Plan.
Enabling Sprint PCS Vision
1. Make sure your device’s phone is turned on, as described in “Turning Your
Device’s Phone On and Off” on page 55.
2. Press Option
, and then press Phone
.
3. When the Connect to the Internet dialog box appears, select Yes to open your
device’s Web browser and make a Sprint PCS Vision connection.
䡲 If you have not already done so, select Now when the Preparing Vision
Services dialog box appears. This initiates a one-time process to
configure your Sprint PCS Vision services. At the end of this two-minute
process, your device connects to the Sprint PCS Vision home page.
䡲 If you want to cancel the connection, select No.
Tip:
To bypass the Connect to the Internet dialog box in the future, check the
Don’t ask me again box.
4. Use the 5-way
to scroll around and select from a variety of online
services.
5. Go to Applications
108
to exit the browser and end your session.
Section 3A: Sprint PCS Vision®—The Basics
Sprint Power Vision Features
With Sprint PCS Vision services, you have access to additional features, better
performance, faster Web connections, and a wider variety of online services.
Features such as Web access, graphically enriched games, and sending/receiving
digital images are available on your Treo™ 700P smart device through the
Nationwide Sprint PCS Network.
Sprint PCS® Picture Mail
Instantly shoot, share, and print sharp, high-resolution digital
pictures, and take and send short video clips with your device.
(Camera devices only.)
Messaging
Send and receive email, text, and multimedia messages, or chat.
SM
SprintTV
Watch live Mobile Digital TV (MDTV) on the go with full-motion
video and vivid sound.
Games
Play exciting games with full-color graphics, sound, and vibration.
Section 3A: Sprint PCS Vision®—The Basics
109
Sprint PCS Vision
Ringers
Personalize your Treo 700P smart device by downloading ringtones.
You can use Sound preferences to assign these tones to different
applications and to assign a tone to a specific contact.
Screen Savers
Download unique images to use as wallpaper, or make it easy to
tell who’s calling by assigning specific images to entries in your
contacts list.
Web
Experience full-color graphic versions of popular Web sites.
On Demand
Set and then receive customized, up-to-date information on sports,
weather, news, money, and more, on demand—the way you want it.
Sprint PCS Business ConnectionSM
Obtain secure, real-time access to your Microsoft Outlook or Lotus
Notes company email, calendar, business directory, and personal
contacts.
110
Section 3A: Sprint PCS Vision®—The Basics
Accessing Sprint PCS Vision
Once your device is activated, you are signed in and ready to connect to
Sprint PCS Vision services at any time.
Sprint PCS Vision User Name
Your Sprint PCS Vision User Name is automatically assigned to you. Your user
name, which resembles an email address (for example, [email protected]), is
used with Sprint PCS Mail and Messaging services. Remember, with Sprint PCS
Business Connection, you can use virtually any email address (see “Sprint PCS
SM
Business Connection ” on page 142). Your Sprint PCS Vision User Name is simply
an additional address that identifies your Sprint PCS Account. When your device
is enabled with Sprint PCS Vision services, your user name automatically appears
on the Phone Info screen.
To find your user name:
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Info.
111
Sprint PCS Vision
Section 3A: Sprint PCS Vision®—The Basics
Sprint PCS Vision Symbols on Your Screen
When you are connected to Sprint PCS Vision services, a data connection icon
appears at the top of the Main view in the Phone application. See “Checking
Signal Strength and Phone Status” on page 100 for a description of the various
data connection icons.
Sprint PCS Vision Billing Information
See your service plan for details on Sprint PCS Vision billing.
112
Section 3A: Sprint PCS Vision®—The Basics
Sprint Power Vision
SM
Sprint Power Vision
S e c ti o n 3 B
In This Section
⽧
Getting to Know Sprint Power Vision
⽧
Personalizing Your Service With On Demand
⽧
Using Your Device’s Phone as a Modem
Section 3B: Sprint Power Vision
113
Getting to Know Sprint Power Vision
Sprint Power Vision combines unmatched visual and sound clarity with
broadband-like speeds on your wireless phone. Utilizing the fastest commercially
available wireless network technology (1xEV-DO) and leveraging continued
investment in handset and application development, Sprint Power Vision offers
the ultimate in wireless entertainment, real imaging solutions, instant
communication, and personalized information at broadband-like speeds. Your
Treo 700P smart device is equipped with the latest in multimedia, imaging, and
processing technology, and offers exclusive services, such as On Demand.
Note:
The Treo 700P smart device’s data services work anywhere on the Nationwide
Sprint PCS® Network. These services perform at enhanced speeds with
improved quality in areas with high-speed data coverage. Go to www.sprint.com
or see our coverage map for details and more information.
Enabling Sprint Power Vision
Since Sprint Power Vision is an enhancement to your device’s Sprint PCS Vision®
capabilities, you don’t need to take any extra action to make Sprint Power Vision
available. As long as your device’s Sprint PCS Vision setting is enabled (see
“Enabling Sprint PCS Vision” on page 108), your device is ready to access Sprint
Power Vision services where available.
When your device has a Sprint Power Vision connection, a Power Vision status
icon ( or ) is displayed at the top of the screen. (For details, see “Checking
Signal Strength and Phone Status” on page 100.)
114
Section 3B: Sprint Power Vision
With Sprint Power Vision’s exclusive On Demand feature, you can personalize
your device’s data services to suit your needs. The On Demand feature makes it
easier than ever to retrieve the most popular Web information and categories
instantly. On Demand uses the ZIP code you provide to customize the content you
receive, so you can get the information you want, when you want it.
Sprint Power Vision
Personalizing Your Service With On Demand
On Demand acts like a computer browser’s customized home page, displaying a
variety of top categories such as News, Sports, Weather, Money, Movies, and
more. This information is updated throughout the day, so you’ll always be up-todate. In addition to presenting a number of fixed categories, On Demand also
offers optional categories (for an additional monthly charge) that allow faster
access to even more information.
Initializing Your On Demand Service
1. Go to Applications
and select On Demand
.
2. Enter your preferred ZIP code and select Next.
(The On Demand service will customize itself to
your selected location, and the On Demand menu
screen will be displayed.)
Section 3B: Sprint Power Vision
115
Accessing On Demand Information
Finding the information you’re looking for with On Demand is as easy as
navigating a Web browser on your computer. (The following examples illustrate
how to access News and Movies information.)
To Access News Information Using On Demand:
1. Go to Applications
and select On Demand
.
(The On Demand menu screen will be displayed.)
2. From the On Demand menu screen, highlight
News (the button name changes to Late Breaking
News & Photos), and then press Center
.
3. Depending on which category you select, you
will see a menu with additional options (for this
example, you would be able to select from such
subcategories as “Top Stories,” “US News,” “World News,” and “Politics”).
4. Select a subcategory, and then select an article you would like to view. (The
article will be displayed.)
5. Navigate the content as follows:
116
䡲
Press Up
or Down
to scroll through the article.
䡲
If there is a link to a related article or picture, press Left
link.
䡲
Press Right
to select the
to access the options at the bottom of the screen.
Section 3B: Sprint Power Vision
1. Go to Applications
and select On Demand
screen will be displayed.)
. (The On Demand menu
2. From the On Demand menu screen, highlight Movies (the button name
changes to Hollywood News & Showtimes), and press Center
current movie titles will be displayed.)
. (A list of
3. Select a movie title.
4. From the Movie Title display, select an option and follow the onscreen
Sprint Power Vision
To Access Movies Information Using On Demand:
instructions. Options available may include:
䡲 Shows for Date to select a date for the movie.
䡲 <theater listing> to view the movie’s
showtimes at a number of selected movie
theaters in your area. Follow the onscreen
instructions to purchase will-call tickets (may
not be available for all theaters or for all
showtimes).
䡲 Details to view the movie’s details, which
may include cast, running time, plot synopsis, MPAA rating, reviews, and
so on.
Additional fixed On Demand categories such as Money (which features a
customizable stock ticker [delayed 20 minutes]), Weather, and Sports (which
allows you to select your top teams), along with optional categories such as Maps
and TV Guide, bring the information you want right to your screen—all without
having to go through a traditional Web search.
Section 3B: Sprint Power Vision
117
Using Your Device’s Phone as a Modem
Your device’s data capabilities enable you to use your device’s phone as a modem
for your laptop computer anywhere on the Sprint advanced wireless high-speed
data network. You'll be able to send and receive email, browse the Internet, and
access your company’s network anywhere on the Nationwide Sprint PCS
Network.
Note:
To use this service, you are required to sign up on a Sprint Power Vision with
Phone as Modem plan. Go to www.sprint.com or visit a Sprint Store for Phone as
Modem plan details and more information.
Setting Up a Data Connection With Your Computer
In order to use your phone as a modem, you’ll first need to load the Sprint PCS®
Connection Manager software on your computer, and then use the sync cable to
connect your device to your computer.
To set up your phone-to-computer data connection:
1. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your device into
your computer’s CD drive and select the link to download and install the
Sprint PCS Connection Manager software and drivers.
2. Once the software has been fully installed, connect your device to your
computer using the sync cable. (When your computer detects the
connection, an icon
is displayed in the taskbar in the lower-right corner
of your computer screen.)
118
Section 3B: Sprint Power Vision
Phone On and Off” on page 55) and that one of the Power Vision icons (
or ) appears at the top of the screen.
Note:
If neither icon appears, you cannot use your device as a modem with Sprint PCS
Connection Manager.
4. On your computer, open the Sprint PCS Connection Manager software, select
Sprint Power Vision
3. Make sure your device’s phone is turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s
your device name, and then click Connect.
5. Once the connection is established, launch an Internet session, check your
email, or do anything else you would do using a traditional Internet
connection.
6. When you’re ready to terminate the Internet connection, double-click the
Sprint PCS Connection Manager icon
in the taskbar in the lower-right
corner of your computer screen, and then click Disconnect to end the
session.
Note:
While your Power Vision data connection is active, you can receive incoming
calls and place outgoing calls; however, doing either of these suspends the data
connection until you hang up the call.
Sprint PCS Vision services are available on the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network.
Sprint Power Vision services work anywhere on the Nationwide Sprint PCS
Network, but broadband-like download speeds are available only in areas with
high-speed data coverage.
Section 3B: Sprint Power Vision
119
120
Section 3B: Sprint Power Vision
Section 3C
Using Email
⽧
What Email Applications Can I Use on My Smart Device?
⽧
The VersaMail Application
⽧
Sprint PCS Business Connection
⽧
Using GoodLink™ Wireless Messaging
Email
In This Section
SM
Section 3C: Using Email
121
What Email Applications Can I Use on My Smart Device?
If you’ve activated Sprint PCS Vision®, you’re ready to set up an email application
on your Treo™ 700P smart device. You can use the email application with your
Sprint email account, as well as with other email accounts, such as Yahoo! or
Earthlink. You can also use the email application with a corporate account.
Your device includes three email application options:
䢇
The VersaMail® application
䢇
Sprint PCS Business Connection
GoodLink™ wireless messaging
䢇
SM
You can also access Web-based email from your device’s Web browser.
Note:
An email application is not an email provider. It works with an account
from a provider—your Sprint account, for example—or a corporate
account to transfer messages to your device.
Which Application Should I Use?
0
I want to …
Use this application …
Check free Web mail, such as Hotmail, Gmail, or
Yahoo!
Web browser
Check fee-based Internet mail, such as Yahoo! Mail
Plus or AOL
VersaMail
122
Section 3C: Using Email
Use this application …
Check email from an IMAP account
VersaMail
Sync my email and organizer information with my
company’s Exchange server
VersaMail, Business
Connection, GoodLink
Sync my email with my company’s Domino server
VersaMail, Business
Connection
Access email from one to three email accounts
VersaMail, Business
Connection
Access email from four to eight email accounts
VersaMail
Use the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) while
sending and receiving messages
GoodLink
Section 3C: Using Email
Email
I want to …
123
The VersaMail Application
Before you can use VersaMail, you need to enter your email account settings. If
you have multiple email accounts, you must enter settings for each account.
After you enter your email account settings, see the User Guide for the VersaMail
Application on the Palm Software Installation CD for information on sending and
receiving messages and customizing your VersaMail settings.
How Do I Get Started?
1. If you’re entering settings for an email account on a Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync® server, a Lotus Notes server, or a Microsoft MAPI server, see the
User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm Software Installation
CD for setup steps.
2. If your email provider is listed in the following table, skip to “Setting Up
VersaMail to Work With Common Providers” on page 125.
Tip:
Your email provider is the service you use to send and receive email.
Your email provider’s name appears between the @ symbol and the dot
symbol in your email address.
0
AOL
Apple.Mac
AT&T Global
AT&T Worldnet
Bell South
124
Comcast
CompuServe
Covad
EarthLink
Gmail
RCN
SBC/PacBell
SBC/Prodigy
Speakeasy
Verizon DSL
Section 3C: Using Email
Cablevision
Charter
Mail.com
NetZero
Yahoo!
3. If your email provider’s name is not listed, you need to obtain the following
Note:
Email
information from your system administrator or ISP, and then skip to
“Setting Up VersaMail to Work With Other Providers” on page 126.
䡲 Mail protocol: POP or IMAP
䡲 Incoming and outgoing mail server names, such as mail.myisp.com
䡲 Incoming and outgoing mail server port numbers, such as 110
(incoming POP), 143 (incoming IMAP), or 25 (outgoing POP or IMAP)
䡲 (If necessary) Security settings: APOP, ESMTP, SSL
The correct protocol, server, and security settings are required for
VersaMail to be able to send and receive email for your account. Your
email provider can easily provide these settings.
Setting Up VersaMail to Work With Common Providers
1. Go to Applications
Tip:
and select Email
.
The first time you set up VersaMail, you are asked if you want to
continue with account setup after you open the application. Select
Continue and go to step 3.
Section 3C: Using Email
125
2. Open the menus
, select Accounts, select Account
Setup, and then select New.
3. In the Account Name field, enter a descriptive name,
such as Work Email.
4. Select the Mail Service pick list, and then select your
email provider, such as Earthlink. Select Next.
5. Enter the username for your email account. Your
username appears before the @ symbol in your
email address.
6. Select the Password box, enter your email account password, select OK, and
then select Next.
7. Select Next, and then select Done.
Tip:
To set more options for incoming and outgoing messages, select
Advanced on the Account setup complete screen.
8. On the Account Setup screen, select OK to go to the Inbox of this account.
Setting Up VersaMail to Work With Other Providers
1. Go to Applications
Tip:
126
and select Email
.
The first time you set up VersaMail, you are asked if you want to
continue with account setup after you open the application. Select
Continue and go to step 3.
Section 3C: Using Email
2. Open the menus
, select Accounts, select Account
Setup, and then select New.
3. In the Account Name field, enter a descriptive
name, such as Work Email.
4. Select the Mail Service pick list, and then select
Other.
Email
5. Select the Protocol pick list, and then select POP or
IMAP (based on the information you obtained from
your system administrator or ISP). Select Next.
6. Enter the username for your email account. Your username appears before
the @ symbol in your email address.
7. Select the Password box, enter your email account password, select OK, and
then select Next.
8. Enter your email address and the names of the incoming and outgoing mail
servers, and then select Next.
9. If your system administrator or ISP provided port numbers or security
settings, select Advanced, and then enter those settings.
10. Select Done.
11. On the Account Setup screen, select OK to go to the Inbox of this account.
Section 3C: Using Email
127
Receiving and Viewing Messages
1. Make sure your phone is turned on (see “Turning
Your Device’s Phone On and Off” on page 55).
2. Go to Applications
and select Email
.
3. From any mailbox, select Get or Get & Send.
4. From the Inbox, select the message you want
to view.
5. If a large incoming message is truncated,
select More
.
6. Select Done.
Managing Your Messages
The status icons that appear next to each message in your Inbox indicate the
following:
Only the subject header information is downloaded.
Part or all of the message text is downloaded.
The message includes an attachment.
This message is high priority.
You can rearrange the VersaMail list to make it easier to find and view messages.
䢇 In the Inbox, select Sort, and then select one of the following: By Subject, By
Sender, By Size, or By Date.
128
Section 3C: Using Email
䢇
To quickly switch between folders (for example, the Inbox folder and the Sent
folder), select the folder pick list at the top of the screen and select the desired
folder.
Replying to Messages
1. From the Inbox or another folder, open the
message to which you want to respond.
Email
2. From Message view, select Reply. (Select whether
to reply to just the sender or reply to both the
sender and all other addressees on the
message.)
3. Enter your reply, and then select Send.
Tip:
When you respond to messages, you can select whether to include the
original text (see “Setting Email Preferences” on page 136).
Creating and Sending Messages
1. Go to Applications
and select Email
.
2. From the Inbox, select New.
3. Begin entering the addressee’s email address,
first name, or last name. (If the information
matches one or more entries in Contacts,
VersaMail displays the matching contacts. To
accept a suggestion, select the correct contact.
To send to a different address, keep entering the
email address or name.)
Section 3C: Using Email
129
Tip:
To send a copy or blind copy, select Cc or Bcc, select those lines, and enter
the address(es) in those fields. See “Setting Email Preferences” on
page 136 for details on displaying the Bcc field. For multiple recipients in
any field, enter a semicolon and then a space before entering the next
recipient name or address.
4. Enter the subject and message text. (To move between fields, press Up
Down
Tip:
or
.)
You can mark outgoing messages as high priority. Open the Options
menu and select Set Priority To High.
5. Select one of the following buttons:
䡲
䡲
䡲
Tip:
130
Send connects and sends all messages immediately. (If you select Send
and the message cannot be sent for any reason, the message is stored in
your Outbox. VersaMail makes up to five attempts to automatically
send the message; if automatic send is not successful, an alert message
appears and you must try to manually send the message again.)
Outbox puts the message in the Outbox to send later.
Drafts saves the message so that you can continue working on it at
another time.
If you are composing a message and need to switch to another
application—for example, to answer a phone call—when you return to
the VersaMail application, you are returned to the message you were
composing.
Section 3C: Using Email
Attaching Pictures and Videos
1. Create the message to which you want to attach
the picture or video.
2. On the New Message screen, select the paper clip
icon
in the upper-right corner of the screen.
3. Select Photo/Video from the Type pick list.
list to go to the album containing the picture or
video you want, and then check the box to the left of the picture or video.
5. Select Done.
Tip:
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to attach more than one picture or video to a
message. To remove an attachment, select the file in the Attachments
box, and then select Delete.
Section 3C: Using Email
131
Email
4. On the Select Media screen, select the Album pick
Attaching Voice Memos
1. Create the message to which you want to attach the voice memo.
2. On the New Message screen, select the paper clip icon
in the upper-right
corner of the screen.
3. Select Voice Memo or Voice Memo (wav) from the Type pick list.
4. Select the voice memo you want, and then select OK. If you selected Voice
Memo (wav), select the voice memo you want in the Type box, and then
select Add.
5. Select Done.
Attaching Word, Excel, and PowerPoint Files
1. Create the message to which you want to attach the item.
2. On the New Message screen, select the paper clip icon
in the upper-right
corner of the screen.
3. Select Documents from the Type pick list.
4. Select the file you want on the Documents screen.
5. Select Done.
Tip:
132
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to attach more than one file to a message. To
remove an attachment, select the file in the Attachments box, and then
select Delete.
Section 3C: Using Email
Attaching Other Types of Files
1. Create the message to which you want to attach the item.
2. On the New Message screen, select the paper clip icon
in the upper-right
corner of the screen.
3. Select the type of file to attach—for example, Address, Appointment, or
Memo/Text—from the Type pick list. To attach a ringtone, select Sounds.
you selected Sounds, select the ringtone from the Manage Sound list, and
then select Insert.
5. Select Done.
Tip:
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to attach more than one file to a message. To
remove an attachment, select the file in the Attachments box, and then
select Delete.
Viewing Attachments
You can open a number of attachment types (for example, Microsoft Word, Excel,
and PowerPoint files; PDF files; sound files; and photos) with the built-in
software on your device.
1. From any folder, open the message with the attachment you want to view.
(Messages with downloaded attachments are indicated by a paper clip icon
to the left of the message icon.)
Section 3C: Using Email
133
Email
4. Select the file you want from the list in the Type box, and then select Add. If
Note:
If an attachment is not downloaded because it is larger than your
maximum message size, the paper clip icon does not appear, and the
attachment is not displayed at the bottom of the message screen. Select
More to download and display any attachments.
2. Select the attachment name to view it in the default viewer on your device.
–or–
Select the folder icon to the left of the attachment name to open a menu of
tasks you can do with the attachment, including View, Install, or Unzip,
depending on the attachment file type; Save to save the attachment to your
device or to an expansion card; or Select Viewer to select the application you
want to use to view the attachment.
3. When you have finished with the attachment, select Done to return to the
Attachments dialog box. (If there is no Done button, go to Applications
and select Email
to return to the Inbox of the account you were using.)
Deleting a Single Message
When you delete a message, it moves to the Trash folder.
1. To delete a message from the Inbox or another message screen, highlight
the message, and then press Backspace
.
To delete a message you are reading or composing while the message is
open, just press Backspace
.
2. Select OK to confirm the deletion.
Tip:
134
To delete a single message, you can also highlight it, press Right on the
5-way, and then select Delete.
Section 3C: Using Email
Deleting Multiple Messages
1. On the Inbox or another folder screen, select the bullet next to the icon of
each message that you want to delete. To select adjacent messages, drag
the stylus so that it touches the bullet to the left of each message. Lift the
stylus and drag it again to select more adjacent messages.
2. Open the menus
.
Email
3. Select Delete on the Message menu.
4. If a confirmation message appears, select OK to confirm deletion.
Tip:
When you delete a message in Message view, by default you return to
the Inbox. You can change the setting so that you go to the next
message instead. From the Options menu, select Preferences, select
Deletion, and then select Go to Next Message from the After deleting a
message pick list.
Deleting Messages by Date
You can quickly delete a group of messages by selecting a range of dates.
1. From the Inbox or any folder, open the menus
.
2. Select Delete Old on the Message menu.
3. Select the folder and a date range for the messages you want to delete.
4. Select OK. (If a confirmation dialog box appears, select OK to confirm
deletion.)
Tip:
To empty (or purge) the Trash folder, open the Message menu and select
Empty Trash.
Section 3C: Using Email
135
Switching Between Accounts
You can switch between different email accounts—for example, between your
work and your personal account.
1. From any mailbox screen, open the menus
.
2. Select Accounts, and then select an account.
Setting Email Preferences
You can customize the VersaMail settings for each individual email account on
your Treo device. The preferences you set apply only to the email account you are
currently viewing. If you have multiple accounts, configure each account
separately.
You can customize the display of your mailbox screens, how and when to get new
messages, alert sounds, reply options, and more. For complete instructions on
customizing your email settings, see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application
on the Palm Software Installation CD.
Downloading New Email Messages Automatically
You can set up VersaMail to automatically download
new email messages to your device.
1. From any mailbox screen, open the menus
.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3. Select Auto Sync.
4. Check the Mail box next to the Auto-sync option.
136
Section 3C: Using Email
5. Select the Every pick list and select the time interval, from 5 minutes to 12
hours. (If you set a more frequent interval, you may need to recharge your
device’s battery more often.)
6. Select the Start Time and End Time boxes, and then select the hour, the
minute, and AM or PM to enter the time for the first and last Auto Sync to
take place. Select OK.
Email
7. Select the days you want the schedule to be active. You can choose any
number of days, but you can set up only one schedule for each email
account.
8. Select OK, and then select Get or Get & Send. (Doing this ensures that only
new messages are retrieved during your next Auto Sync retrieval.)
Playing Sounds When New Email Arrives
When new email messages arrive, an alert appears on the Alert screen (see
“Viewing and Using the Alert Screen” on page 103 for information). In addition,
when you schedule Auto Sync for a given account, you can choose a sound—such
as a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you know when new email arrives.
1. From any mailbox screen, open the menus
.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3. Select Alerts.
4. Check the Alert me of new mail box.
5. Select the Alert Sound pick list, and then select a sound. The device plays a
brief demo of the sound.
6. Select OK.
Section 3C: Using Email
137
Note:
To receive notifications of successful Auto Sync retrievals only, uncheck
the Alert me of failures box. Leave the box checked if you want to receive
notifications of both successful and failed Auto Sync retrievals.
Setting Options for Receiving Messages
1. From any mailbox screen, open the menus
.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3. Select Incoming.
4. Set any of the following preferences:
䡲
䡲
䡲
Note:
138
Get indicates whether to get message
subjects only or entire messages.
Ask Every Time indicates whether you want
to see a dialog box for choosing subjects
only or entire messages each time you
retrieve email. If the box is unchecked,
messages are retrieved according to the
option you select in the Get pick list.
Unread messages downloads only unread mail to your device (IMAP
accounts only). If you don’t choose this option and you select Get & Send,
all your messages on your provider’s mail server are downloaded to your
Inbox, including messages you have already read.
The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread mail only from
the server. If you have a POP email account, the Unread messages box
does not appear on the Incoming preferences screen, and VersaMail
downloads all messages regardless of whether you have read them.
Section 3C: Using Email
䡲
䡲
䡲
Note:
The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body
text and approximately 5MB of total data for any attachments. To view
a message whose total size is greater than the maximum message size
you select but is less than 5MB, you need to select More on the message
screen to fully download the message.
䡲
Message Format sets the format in which you retrieve messages. If you
choose HTML, any messages sent in HTML format appear with basic
HTML formatting intact. Other messages appear as plain text. If you
choose Text, all messages appear as plain text, regardless of the format
in which they were sent.
Note:
VersaMail sends all messages as plain text only, with all HTML tags
stripped, even if you are forwarding or replying to a message that was
originally received as HTML.
5. Select OK.
Section 3C: Using Email
139
Email
Mail from last gets messages sent within the number of days you specify
(default is 3).
Download attachments allows files attached to email to be
automatically downloaded to your device. Attachments that exceed the
maximum message size cannot be downloaded.
Maximum message size sets the maximum size limit, in kilobytes (KB),
for how much of an incoming email message is downloaded. The
maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default (that is, the
first 5KB of all incoming email messages is downloaded), but you can
enter any size up to 2,048KB (approximately 2 megabytes, or 2MB),
including attachments.
Attaching a Signature to a Message
You can attach a personal signature, with information such as your company's
address and its fax and telephone numbers, to the bottom of all messages you
send.
1. From any mailbox screen, open the menus
.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3. Select Signature.
4. Check the Attach Signature box.
5. Enter your signature information, and then select OK.
140
Section 3C: Using Email
Getting Messages From Your Corporate Microsoft Exchange Server Onto Your
Device
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with the Calendar, Contacts, and VersaMail
applications on your device to directly access corporate groupware information
on a Microsoft Exchange 2003 server. You can wirelessly synchronize information
in these applications on the server from your device without using a desktop
computer.
Information in other applications on your device, such as Tasks and Memos,
continues to sync with and appear in the desktop software on your computer
(Outlook or Palm Desktop).
For complete information on using a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, see
the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm Software Installation CD.
Section 3C: Using Email
141
Email
A Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account interacts with your desktop software as
follows:
䢇 Microsoft Outlook: Information in Calendar, Contacts, and VersaMail on your
device syncs with the server; it does not sync directly with Outlook on your
desktop. However, if the server syncs with Outlook on your desktop, any
information you enter in these applications on your device also appears in
Outlook after the next server sync.
䢇 Palm® Desktop software: Information in Calendar, Contacts, and VersaMail on
your device does not sync with and does not appear in Palm® Desktop
software on your computer.
SM
Sprint PCS Business Connection
You can install the optional Sprint PCS Business Connection application for secure,
real-time access to your Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes company email,
calendar, business directory, and personal contacts. For more information and to
sign up, visit www.sprint.com.
1. Go to Applications
and select Get BC
.
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to download and install the software.
After you install the Sprint PCS Business Connection application on your device,
press Messaging
to open the application.
For complete setup instructions, see the Email on Your Sprint Power Vision Smart
Device Treo™ 700p by Palm booklet.
142
Section 3C: Using Email
Using GoodLink™ Wireless Messaging
For more information and to sign up, visit www.good.com.
1. Go to Applications
and select Get Good
.
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to download and install the software.
After you install the GoodLink on your device, press Messaging
software.
Section 3C: Using Email
to open the
143
Email
You can install the optional GoodLink software for secure, real-time access to your
Microsoft Outlook email, calendar, contacts, tasks, and notes. GoodLink offers
real-time push synchronization of email and personal information; as messages
are received on the server, they are automatically downloaded to your device.
GoodLink also offers attachment viewing through the Documents application on
your device and integration with your corporate Global Address List (GAL).
144
Section 3C: Using Email
Sec tion 3D
Messaging
In This Section
Creating and Sending Messages
⽧
Receiving Messages
⽧
Using Messaging to Chat
⽧
Managing Your Messages
⽧
Customizing Your Messaging Settings
⽧
Using Online Services
Section 3D: Messaging
Messaging
⽧
145
Creating and Sending Messages
You can exchange brief text messages with other wireless phones that have text
messaging capability. You can also send Sprint PCS® Picture Mail messages
(including images, videos, voice memos, and text) to other users. Both text
messages and Sprint PCS Picture Mail messages can also be sent to email
addresses. Before you use your Treo™ 700P smart device to send or receive
messages, please verify pricing and availability with Sprint.
Before you use Messaging, make sure your phone is turned on, as described in
“Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off” on page 55.
Creating and Sending a Text Message
You can exchange text messages of up to 160 characters. Messages with more
than 160 characters are automatically split into several messages.
Note:
If you send a text message to an email address, the email address is
deducted from the 160-character count.
1. Press Messaging
.
2. Select New.
3. Select the To field to address the message:
䡲
146
Press Center
. If the recipient’s name
appears in the list of recent addresses, select it
from the list.
Section 3D: Messaging
䡲
䡲
Tip:
If the recipient is in your Contacts list, enter the first initial and last name
(no spaces), and then select the recipient’s phone number or email
address, depending on where you want to send the message.
If the recipient’s name isn’t in the list of recent addresses or your
Contacts list, enter the phone number or email address.
If you see numbers when you expect to see letters (or the other way
around), you need to turn Option Lock on by pressing Option twice or
turn it off by pressing Option once.
to jump to the body of the message.
5. Enter your message or select QuickText
insert emoticons, select
Tip:
to insert predefined phrases. To
.
Some symbols can’t be used in text messages. The Messaging
application automatically replaces invalid characters.
6. (Optional) Open the menus
, and then select High Priority or Normal
Priority on the Compose menu to set an urgency level for the message.
7. Select Send.
If you are out of a coverage area or if your device is off, outgoing messages go into
the Outbox folder. When you return to a coverage area, your pending messages
are sent automatically and are transferred to the Sent folder.
Section 3D: Messaging
147
Messaging
4. Press Down
Creating and Sending a Sprint PCS Picture Mail Message
Sprint PCS Picture Mail messages consist of pictures, videos, text, and sounds.
You can include pictures and videos you captured with the built-in camera (if
included) as well as any of the following items:
䢇 QCELP sound clips as voice memos
䢇 Pictures
䢇 Videos
䢇 Text messages
䢇 Voice memos
The first time you share a picture or video, you are prompted to establish a
Sprint PCS Picture Mail account and password. Enter a four- to eight-digit,
alphanumeric password and press Center
. Once you receive confirmation,
you can continue to send or upload pictures and videos.
Note:
For information about the terms of your Sprint PCS Picture Mail service,
please visit http://pictures.sprintpcs.com/tos.do.
1. Press Messaging
.
2. Select New.
3. Select the To field to address the message:
䡲
148
Press Center
. If the recipient’s name appears in the list of recent
addresses, select it from the list.
Section 3D: Messaging
䡲
䡲
Tip:
If the recipient is in your Contacts list, enter the first initial and last name
(no spaces), and then select the recipient’s phone number or email
address, depending on where you want to send the message.
If the recipient’s name is not in the list of recent addresses or your
Contacts list, enter the mobile number or email address.
You may need to press Option to enter letters or numbers. The Option
Lock setting defaults to the setting you used the last time you addressed
a message.
5. Select the Media icon and select one of the
following:
䡲 Attach from device lets you attach a picture or
video from your device.
䡲 Attach from Online lets you attach a picture or
video from your online album. See “Using
Your Online Album” on page 200 for
information.
䡲 Take new picture prompts you to take a new picture with the built-in
camera and attach it to the message.
䡲 Take new video prompts you to capture a new video with the built-in
camcorder and attach it to the message.
6. (Optional) Repeat step 5 for each item you want to attach.
Section 3D: Messaging
149
Messaging
4. Select Add media.
7. Enter your message or select QuickText
insert emoticons, select
to insert predefined phrases. To
.
8. Select Send.
Your device uploads the pictures or videos to the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Web site
(www.sprint.com/picturemail), creates a private Guest Book for the recipient on
the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Web site, and sends your message to the recipient.
The recipient can then use a Web browser to access this private Guest Book to
view the pictures or videos and to enter comments. You can view the comments
later from the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Web site.
If you are outside a coverage area or if your phone is off, outgoing messages go
into the Drafts folder. When you return to a coverage area, you can open the
message in the Drafts folder and send it.
Messaging Tips
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
150
You can address messages to multiple recipients by separating the addresses
with a comma.
When entering message text, you can insert emotive symbols by pressing and
holding Center
and selecting emoticons, or insert predefined QuickText
phrases by selecting QuickText
and then selecting a phrase. To add a new
phrase, select Edit QuickText from the list.
Not all the symbols that are available on your device can be used in your
messages. The Messaging application automatically replaces invalid
characters before it sends messages.
You can send and receive text messages (but not Picture Mail messages) even
while you are on a phone call. This is easiest when using the hands-free
headset or speakerphone.
Section 3D: Messaging
Receiving Messages
When your phone is on and is in an area of wireless coverage, you automatically
receive new text messages. You can also configure your device to notify you when
a message arrives (see “Selecting Messaging Alert Tones” on page 157).
Tip:
If you have multiple alerts, the Alert screen displays all your pending
alerts. Select an alert to jump to that item, or check the box to clear that
alert. To view all your pending alerts from any screen on your device,
press and hold Center on the 5-way.
Section 3D: Messaging
151
Messaging
The new message alert may include any of the following buttons:
䢇 OK dismisses the alert and places the message in your Inbox.
䢇 Reply opens Chat view, where you can reply with a text
message. To send a multimedia message reply, select
Add from Chat view.
䢇 Call Back dials the sender’s phone number.
䢇 Go To Msg opens the message so you can view its full
contents.
䢇 Go To opens the message so you can view its full
contents in your online Sprint PCS Picture Mail
account. See “Working With Your Online Picture Mail Album” on page 201 for
details.
䢇 Delete deletes the received message directly from the message alert.
Using Links in Messages
When you receive a message that contains a telephone number, email address, or
URL, you can dial the number, send an email message, or go directly to the Web
page.
1. Press Messaging
.
2. Select the message that contains the link you want to use.
3. Select the phone number, email address, or URL (appears as underlined blue
text).
Your device automatically opens the appropriate application from the link.
Arranging Your Messages
You can rearrange the messages in any folder by using the
Sort command.
1. Press Messaging
.
2. Select the folder list in the title bar, and then select
the folder you want to sort.
3. Open the menus
.
4. Select View, and then select Sort by Name or Sort by
Date.
152
Section 3D: Messaging
Deleting Messages
You can delete several messages at once from any folder by using the Purge
command.
1. Press Messaging
.
2. Select the folder list in the title bar, and then select the folder that contains
the messages you want to delete.
3. Open the menus
.
4. Select Purge from the Message menu.
Messaging
5. Select the Purge pick list, and then select an option.
6. Select OK.
Section 3D: Messaging
153
Using Messaging to Chat
When you exchange more than one message with a single contact, the messages
you exchange with that person are grouped into a chat session. When you select
a chat session from your message list, the upper part of Chat view displays all text
messages you’ve exchanged with this contact, and the lower part provides an
entry area. You can carry on multiple chats at the same time and easily switch
between them, using the pick list at the top of the screen.
1. Press Messaging
.
2. Do one of the following:
䡲
䡲
To start a new chat, select a message and
reply to it.
To continue an existing chat, select a message
with the chat icon
.
3. Enter your message.
4. Select Send.
To find a chat you had with someone, open your Messaging Inbox and select a chat
session.
Tip:
154
To add pictures, sounds, or videos to your message, select Add.
Section 3D: Messaging
Managing Your Messages
The message descriptions in the Inbox, Outbox, and Sent folders show the
message status:
䢇 Unread messages appear in bold.
䢇 Read messages appear in plain text.
䢇 Urgent messages appear with a red exclamation point (!).
The following icons show the message type and additional status information:
Messaging
A text message
A PictureMail message
A voicemail page
A chat session
A text message with an error
A PictureMail message with an error
Section 3D: Messaging
155
Customizing Your Messaging Settings
1. Press Messaging
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
4. On the Messages tab, set any of the following
preferences for your individual messages:
䡲 Create new messages as indicates whether you
default to a text message or a Sprint PCS
Picture Mail message when you create a new
message.
䡲 Confirm message deletions indicates whether
deletion confirmation prompts appear.
䡲 Privacy Mode (hide text) indicates whether the body text appears in the
alert when you receive a new message.
5. Select the Chat tab and set any of the following
preferences for chat sessions:
䡲 Create chats from messages indicates when you
want to group text messages from the same
person into a chat.
䡲 Show timestamps in chats displays next to each
message the local date and time the message
was sent.
156
Section 3D: Messaging
䡲
䡲
䡲
Display my name in chat window as indicates the text label for your
messages in Chat view.
Label color sets a color to differentiate your messages from the sender’s
messages in Chat view.
Use color for indicates whether both your name and message appear in a
different color, or only your name.
6. Select OK.
Selecting Messaging Alert Tones
.
2. Open the menus
.
Messaging
1. Press Messaging
3. Select Options, and then select Alerts.
4. Select the Application pick list, and then select
Messaging.
5. Select the Volume pick list, and then select the
volume level.
6. Select the Vibrate pick list, and then select when
you want the vibrate option to turn on.
7. Select the Message Tone pick list, and then select a tone for incoming
message alerts.
8. Check the Show Message Alerts box if you want to see an onscreen alert
when a new message arrives.
9. Select Done.
Section 3D: Messaging
157
Using Online Services
Sprint PCS Picture Mail Online Services let you access printing and other services
for photos and videos when you compose and send a Picture Mail message from
your Treo device. For example, if you send a message containing a picture, you can
select an online printing service, which will print and deliver a copy of the picture
to you. Additional fees may be required to use Online Services.
Accessing Online Services
1. Press Messaging
.
2. Select Online Services
in the lower-right corner of the screen.
3. If prompted, enter or create a password.
4. If the Welcome! screen appears, select Continue.
5. Select the service you want to use.
6. Create your Picture Mail message as described in “Creating and Sending a
Sprint PCS Picture Mail Message” on page 148. The media you include with
the message is sent to the service you select for processing.
158
Section 3D: Messaging
Sec tion 3 E
Browsing the Web
In This Section
⽧
Viewing a Web Page
⽧
Working With Web Pages
⽧
Working With Bookmarks and Saved Pages
⽧
Customizing Your Web Browser Settings
Section 3E: Browsing the Web
159
Browsing the Web
The Web browser on your Treo™ 700P smart device provides quick and easy access
to Web pages. You can view most of the sites you use on your computer, including
those with security and advanced features such as JavaScript and frames. To
browse the Web, you must activate Sprint PCS Vision® data services. See
“Enabling Sprint PCS Vision” on page 108.
Viewing a Web Page
The Web browser uses patent-pending technology to optimize Web pages for
your device. By default, the browser reformats Web pages into a single column
and resizes images on your screen. That way, you can see most of the content
without scrolling left or right.
1. Make sure your phone is turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On
and Off” on page 55).
2. Go to Applications
should see either the
Note:
and confirm that data services are available. You
or the
icon.
If you do not see either of the above icons, data services are not available
in your current location and you cannot connect to the Internet.
3. Select Web
.
4. Enter a Web page address (URL) in the address bar
and select Go. If you browse to a secure Web page, a
lock
appears in the address bar.
5. Do any of the following to navigate within the Web
page:
䡲 View a page in wide layout format (as on your
computer): Open the menus
, select Options,
and then select Wide Page Mode.
160
Section 3E: Browsing the Web
䡲
䡲
Scroll through the page: In Optimized Mode (the default format, which is
optimized for your device screen), press Up or Down . In Wide Page
Mode, press Up , Down , Left , or Right to scroll in all directions.
Follow a link to another Web page: In Optimized Mode, highlight the link
by pressing Up , Down , Left , or Right , and then press Center
to go to the selected page.
Tip:
In Wide Page Mode, use the stylus to tap a link.
䡲
Submit a form: Enter the information and then select the onscreen
button to submit the form. If the form doesn’t have an onscreen button,
press Return
6. Use the 5-way
to access any of the following icons in the title bar:
Browsing the Web
Tip:
.
To quickly jump to the title bar from anywhere on a Web page, press
Space to go to the address bar, and then press Up on the 5-way.
Goes to your home page.
Opens a dialog box where you can enter a Web address
you want to go to or view a list of recently viewed Web
pages.
Goes to the previous Web page.
Section 3E: Browsing the Web
161
Goes to the next Web page.
Refreshes the page with the latest content from the
Internet.
Opens a list where you can select Fast Mode (no images or
style sheets) or Normal Mode (with images and style
sheets).
Tip:
162
The navigation bar shows status information while a page is loading.
You don’t have to wait for a page to fully load to navigate within the
page or to select a link to another page. However, if you select a link
while a page is loading and you receive a message saying that JavaScript
is not ready, wait for the page to finish loading and then select the link
again.
Section 3E: Browsing the Web
Working With Web Pages
Downloading Files From a Web Page
The Web browser lets you download files that are recognized by one of the
applications on your device. When you download a file, you can open it in the
application that recognizes the file. For example, if you download a picture, you
can view it later in the Pics&Videos application. If a file is not recognized by any of
the applications on your device, you can download the file to an expansion card,
but you cannot open it on your device.
You can download files such as new applications, and choose to play or save
music and video files in many popular formats—provided that the Web site
permits the downloading of files.
Supported File Types
Pictures
JPEG, BMP, WBMP, GIF, animated GIF
Videos
MP4, 3G2, ASF
Ringtones
MIDI, QCELP, AAC, AAC+
Music
MP3
Browsing the Web
Item
1. Go to the page that contains the link to the file you want to download.
2. Press Left
Center
or Right
to highlight the link to the file, and then press
.
Section 3E: Browsing the Web
163
3. If prompted, select what you want to do with the file: Play, Save To Device, or
Save To Card.
4. Select Yes.
Tip:
You can also save an image from a Web page by tapping and holding it
with the stylus. In addition, you can access software and other
downloads using the Downloads bookmark.
Streaming Files From a Web Page
The Web browser lets you stream files that are recognized by one of the
applications on your device. For example, you can choose to play music and video
files in many popular formats, such as MP3, WMA, and WMV.
1. When the Web browser recognizes streamed content on a Web page, it
displays a Play icon
tap Play
.
. To view or listen to the streamed content,
2. Once streaming begins, playback starts automatically. Use the following
controls when viewing or listening:
164
䡲
Select
to return to the original Web page.
䡲
Select
or press Center
playback.
to pause
䡲
Select
or press Center
playback after pausing.
to resume
䡲
A few seconds after playback begins, the
toolbar is hidden and you can view the
Section 3E: Browsing the Web
䡲
content on the full screen. Press Up
or Down
to display the
toolbar; press Up
or Down
again to hide the toolbar again.
Press the Volume button on the side of your device to adjust the volume.
Note:
If the Web browser recognizes streamed content that is not supported
by any application on your device, a “Media type not supported”
message appears.
Copying Text From a Web Page
You can copy text from a Web page and paste it into other applications.
1. Use the stylus to highlight the text you want to copy.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Edit, and then select Copy.
5-way
text.
or the stylus to position the cursor where you want to paste the
5. Open the menus
.
6. Select Edit, and then select Paste.
Section 3E: Browsing the Web
165
Browsing the Web
4. Go to the application in which you want to paste the text, and then use the
Returning to Recently Viewed Pages
The History list stores the addresses of the last one hundred pages you visited.
Items in the History list are sorted chronologically.
1. From Page view, open the menus
.
2. Select History from the Page menu.
3. Press Down
to navigate through the list.
4. Select the Web page you want to load.
Tip:
To clear all items from the History list, select Clear All. To bookmark any
page on the list, highlight the page and then select Bookmark. If you
clear all History list items, the Web browser does not suggest any entries
when you begin entering a Web address, even if you have the Autocomplete feature turned on (see “Customizing Your Web Browser
Settings” on page 170 for information on Auto-complete).
Finding Text on a Web Page
1. From Page view, open the menus
.
2. Select Find Text on Page on the Page menu.
3. Enter the text you want to find.
4. Check or uncheck the Wrap Search box to indicate whether you want the
search to wrap from the end of the page to the beginning when the search
reaches the end of the page.
5. Select Find to start the search.
166
Section 3E: Browsing the Web
Working With Bookmarks and Saved Pages
Creating a Bookmark
With bookmarks, you can quickly access a Web page without entering the
address every time. The Web browser can store up to one hundred bookmarks or
saved pages, allowing you to open your favorite Web pages quickly. Note that a
bookmark is different from a favorite button (see “Defining Favorite Buttons” on
page 78).
1. Go to the page you want to bookmark.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Add Bookmark from the Page menu.
4. (Optional) Change the entries in the Name and
Saving a Page
You can use the Web browser to save a page for offline viewing, so that you don’t
need an Internet connection to view it later.
1. Go to the page you want to save.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Save Page from the Page menu.
4. Select OK, and then select OK again.
Section 3E: Browsing the Web
167
Browsing the Web
Description fields.
5. Select OK, and then select OK again.
Viewing Bookmarks or Saved Pages
Bookmarks and saved pages appear in Bookmarks view.
Saved pages are indicated by a small triangle in the
upper-right corner of the bookmark.
1. Select the Bookmarks view icon
.
2. Select the bookmark or saved page you want to
view.
Editing or Deleting a Bookmark or Saved Page
1. From Bookmarks view, open the
menus
.
2. Select Edit Bookmarks from the Bookmarks menu.
3. Select the bookmark or saved page you want to edit or delete.
4. Enter the desired changes.
5. Select OK.
168
Section 3E: Browsing the Web
Arranging Bookmarks and Saved Pages
Bookmarks view includes ten pages of bookmarks, so that you can arrange
bookmarks and saved pages in a logical fashion. For example, you can store travel
links on one page, stock links on another, and business links on a third page.
1. From Bookmarks view, open the menus
.
2. Select Edit Bookmarks on the Bookmarks menu.
3. Enter a title for this page of bookmarks.
4. Use the stylus to drag and drop a bookmark into
another slot on the current page of bookmarks.
To move a bookmark to a different page, drag
and drop it onto the Bookmark Page icon .
5. Select OK.
Browsing the Web
Section 3E: Browsing the Web
169
Customizing Your Web Browser Settings
1. Open the menus
.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3. Select Page and set any of the following preferences:
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
Start With indicates which view is displayed
every time you open the Web browser.
Home Page indicates which Web page
appears when you select .
Restore Default resets the home page to the
original Sprint PCS Vision home page if you
changed it.
Show Address Bar indicates whether the Web
address appears in Page view. When the address bar is visible, you can
select the pick list next to it to go to a previously viewed page or enter a
URL directly from Page view.
4. Select General and set any of the following preferences:
䡲
䡲
170
Auto-complete indicates whether the Web
browser suggests text, based on your
previous entries, when you enter
information.
Disable cookies indicates whether Web sites
can store personalized information on your
Treo device. Some sites do not work properly
if you select this option.
Section 3E: Browsing the Web
䡲
䡲
䡲
Disable Javascript bypasses JavaScript elements on the Web pages you view.
Tap and Drag indicates whether dragging the stylus selects text or scrolls
through the content of the page.
Normal mode/Fast mode indicates whether you want to hide selected
items so that Web pages load faster. When you select Fast Mode, you can
set the following options:
⽧ Disable cascading style sheets indicates whether style sheets are
applied when you load a Web page. When style sheets are disabled,
pages download faster, but you may lose some of the formatting.
⽧ Don’t download images! indicates whether images appear when you
load a Web page. If you select not to view images, you can still see
any image by tapping and holding the placeholder box on the Web
page with the stylus.
5. Select Advanced and set any of the following preferences:
䡲
䡲
䡲
Set memory limit for storing pages sets the
amount of memory used for your cache. Pages
are cached so that they load faster the next
time you view them.
Cookies indicates how much memory is being
used by cookies. To free up this memory, select
Clear Cookies.
Cache indicates how much memory is being
used by your cache to store recent pages and history. To free up this
memory, select Clear Cache.
Clear cache on exit indicates whether the cache clears each time you exit
the Web browser.
Section 3E: Browsing the Web
171
Browsing the Web
䡲
䡲
Set Proxy sets up a proxy server to access the Internet. If your connection
requires a proxy server, please contact your Internet service provider or
IT administrator for this information.
6. Select OK.
Note:
172
Setting a proxy server may prevent you from accessing some Sprint PCS
Vision Web pages.
Section 3E: Browsing the Web
S e c ti o n 3F
Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and
Dial-Up Networking
In This Section
⽧
Connecting to Devices With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
⽧
Using Your Device as a Wireless Modem
Bluetooth/DUN
Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking
173
Connecting to Devices With Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
With your Treo™ 700P smart device’s built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology, you
can connect to a number of devices enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology,
such as a headset, car kit, printer, or GPS receiver, as well as to other phones and
handhelds that are enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology. When you
connect to another device, you create a partnership (also referred to by terms
such as trusted pair, trusted device, or pairing) with that device. If your computer
is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can also synchronize
wirelessly or use your phone as a wireless modem.
You can create a list of Bluetooth devices that you trust to communicate with
your Treo device. When communicating with trusted devices, your Treo device
skips the discovery process and creates a secure link as long as the device is
within range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in ideal conditions. Performance
and range are affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby
electronic equipment, and other factors.
When you configure a headset (see “Connecting to a Bluetooth Hands-Free
Device” on page 84), the headset is automatically added to your trusted device
list. Follow the steps in this section to add other devices to your trusted device
list, such as your computer or GPS device enabled with Bluetooth technology.
Entering Basic Bluetooth Settings
To use your Treo device’s Bluetooth functionality, you need to turn the Bluetooth
feature on, and you may need to make your device either temporarily or
permanently visible. You can also enter a name for your device.
174
Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking
1. Go to Applications
and select Bluetooth
.
2. Select On.
3. Enter a device name for your Treo device. (This is
the name that appears on the other Bluetooth
device’s screen when it connects to your Treo
device. You need to enter a device name only
once.)
4. Select the Visibility pick list and select one of the
following:
䡲 Visible enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list
to request a connection with your device. Your device remains
accessible to other devices until you turn this option off.
䡲 Temporary enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device
list to request a connection with your device during the next two
minutes. Your device reverts to the Hidden setting and becomes
inaccessible to other devices after two minutes.
䡲
For your Treo device to be visible to other Bluetooth devices, the
Bluetooth setting must be set to On, and visibility must be set to Visible
or Temporary. Your Treo device screen does not need to be turned on. If
you are requesting a connection with another device, or if you are
accepting a request from a trusted device, your Treo device can be set to
any of the Visibility options.
Hidden allows only devices with which you have previously formed a
partnership to request a connection with your Treo device. New devices
cannot request a connection.
Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking
175
Bluetooth/DUN
Important:
Requesting a Connection With Another Bluetooth Device
1. Go to Applications
and select Bluetooth
.
2. If you have not already done so, enter the basic
Bluetooth settings as described in “Entering
Basic Bluetooth Settings” on page 174.
3. Select Setup Devices.
4. Select Trusted Devices.
5. Select Add Device. The Discovery icon appears,
indicating that the discovery process is active.
6. Select the Show pick list and select Nearby devices.
7. If the device you want to add doesn’t appear in the discovery results list,
make sure that the other device is ready to receive a connection request (see
the device’s documentation), and then select Find More on your Treo device
to search again.
8. Enter the same passkey on your Treo device and on the Bluetooth device,
and then select OK.
Important:
Some Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and GPS receivers, may have a
built-in passkey; other devices may provide a screen where you enter the
passkey. We recommend that you use a passkey of 16 digits, where
possible, to improve the security of your Treo device. The longer the
passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. If the
Bluetooth device has a built-in passkey, see the device’s documentation
for the passkey.
9. Select Done.
176
Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking
Accepting a Connection From Another Bluetooth Device
1. To prepare your Treo device to be able to accept a connection from a
requesting device, enter the basic Bluetooth settings as described in
“Entering Basic Bluetooth Settings” on page 174.
2. Enter the same passkey on your Treo device and on the Bluetooth device.
Important:
Some Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and GPS receivers, may have a
built-in passkey; other devices may provide a screen where you enter the
passkey. We recommend that you use a passkey of 16 digits, where
possible, to improve the security of your Treo device. The longer the
passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. If the
Bluetooth device has a built-in passkey, see the device’s documentation
for the passkey.
3. Select OK.
Note:
Make sure you close the Bluetooth application after you set up devices
and partnerships.
Bluetooth/DUN
Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking
177
Using Your Device as a Wireless Modem
Dial-up networking (DUN) is the feature that converts the phone on your Treo
device into a modem so that you can access the Internet from your computer. You
can set up DUN in one of two ways:
䢇 If you have signed up on a Sprint Power Vision with Phone as Modem plan,
you can use the Sprint Connection Manager software on your computer and
connect your Treo device to your computer using the USB sync cable; see
“Using Your Device’s Phone as a Modem” on page 118 for information.
䢇 If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can set
up your Treo device as a wireless modem using the built-in Bluetooth
technology.
This section describes the process of setting up your device as a wireless modem
using the built-in Bluetooth technology.
Creating a DUN Connection Using Bluetooth Technology
To configure DUN using Bluetooth technology, complete the following
procedures:
䢇 “Creating a Partnership Between Your Device and Your Computer” on
page 179.
䢇 “Setting Up Your Computer for a Bluetooth DUN Connection” on page 180.
䢇 “Accessing the Internet Using a Bluetooth DUN Connection” on page 180.
178
Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking
Creating a Partnership Between Your Device and Your Computer
Note:
If your computer is not enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you
may be able to purchase a wireless Bluetooth adapter accessory for your
computer.
1. Make sure that your computer’s Bluetooth
setting is on and that your computer is ready to
create a Bluetooth partnership. Check the
documentation that came with your computer to
find and change these settings.
2. On your device, go to Applications
Bluetooth
and select
.
3. Select On if it is not selected, and then select Setup Devices.
4. Select Trusted Devices.
5. Select Add Device. The discovery icon appears,
indicating that the discovery process is active.
Bluetooth/DUN
6. Select your computer from the Trusted Devices
list, and then select OK.
7. Enter a passkey on the Bluetooth Security screen,
and then select OK. The passkey can be any
number of up to 16 characters.
8. Enter the same passkey number on your computer when prompted.
9. Select Done, and then select Done again to return to the Bluetooth screen.
Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking
179
Note:
You must enter the same passkey on your device and your computer. We
recommend that you use a passkey of 16 digits, where possible, to
improve the security of your Treo device. The longer the passkey, the
more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered.
Setting Up Your Computer for a Bluetooth DUN Connection
Dial-up networking must be enabled or installed on your computer. Follow the
instructions from the manufacturer of your Bluetooth adapter to enable DUN.
Your wireless service provider may provide customized software programs that
walk you through the DUN setup process. Check with your wireless service
provider to see if such a program is available.
Accessing the Internet Using a Bluetooth DUN Connection
The steps for accessing the Internet on your computer may vary depending on
your operating system and how Bluetooth wireless technology is set up on your
computer—for example, if it is built in versus if you are using a wireless
Bluetooth adapter. If the following procedure does not work with your computer,
check your computer’s documentation for how to set up Bluetooth technology to
access the Internet using a DUN connection.
Note:
You may need to use a virtual private network (VPN) to access corporate
email. Check with your system administrator for more information.
Before you begin, verify that DUN is enabled on both your computer and your
device.
180
Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking
1. Open the Bluetooth screen on your computer and look for the option for
paired devices. Check your computer’s documentation for how to open this
screen and for the name of the paired devices option.
2. Double-click the icon or option representing your
device. Your computer connects to your device and
shows that DUN services are available.
3. Double-click the DUN icon.
4. Enter the following in the Dial field: #777. You do
not need to enter anything in the User Name or
Password field.
5. Click Dial. Once the connection is successfully
established, you can browse the Internet on your
computer or download your email.
Tip:
You may be asked if you want to remember this dial text for this
connection. We recommend that you choose to remember the dial text
to avoid errors and the inconvenience of entering it for every session.
Bluetooth/DUN
To verify that you are connected, look for a network connection icon in the
taskbar at the bottom of your computer screen. To check the status of the
connection, right-click the Bluetooth network icon.
Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking
181
Note:
When a Bluetooth DUN connection is active, you cannot form a
partnership with another device or discover another device. You also
cannot send or receive information wirelessly directly from your device,
browse the Web, or send or receive email messages, and any scheduled
automatic email retrievals do not take place. Incoming calls are
automatically sent to voicemail. You can make outgoing calls, but the
DUN session will be terminated when you place the call.
Terminating a Bluetooth DUN Internet Session
䊳
182
On your computer, right-click the icon or option representing your device,
and then click Disconnect.
Section 3F: Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and Dial-Up Networking
Section 4
Your Portable Media Device
184
S e c ti o n 4 A
Working With Your Pictures and Videos
In This Section
⽧
Taking Pictures and Videos
⽧
Customizing Your Camera Settings
⽧
Viewing Pictures and Videos
⽧
Organizing Pictures and Videos
⽧
Using Your Online Album
⽧
Viewing Pictures and Videos on Your Computer
185
Pictures & Videos
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
Taking Pictures and Videos
The camera version of the Treo™ 700P smart device comes with an easy-to-use,
built-in, 1.3-megapixel camera with 2x digital zoom. You can use the camera to
take and view pictures and videos and send them to your friends and family. To
add a personal touch to your device, use your pictures as your wallpaper in the
Main view of the Phone application, and as caller ID images.
If your Treo device doesn’t have a built-in camera, the sections in this chapter
about taking photos and videos don’t apply to you. But you can still receive and
view photos and videos, send photos and videos to other people as attachments
or as Sprint PCS® Picture Mail, and use photos to personalize your device (such as
wallpaper or photo caller ID; see “Assigning a Caller ID Picture” on page 91 for
details).
You can also upload pictures and videos to albums on the Sprint PCS Picture Mail
Web site (www.sprint.com/picturemail), move them to an expansion card, and
copy them to your Windows computer by synchronizing your device with your
computer.
Additional fees may apply for Sprint PCS Picture Mail service. Contact Sprint for
additional information.
Note:
186
The camera defaults to 1.3 megapixel (1280 x 1024) resolution. The
camera also supports VGA (640 x 480) and QVGA (320 x 240) resolution.
The camcorder defaults to CIF (352 x 288) resolution and also supports
QCIF (176 x 144) resolution. See “Customizing Your Camera Settings” on
page 191 for information on accessing camera and camcorder settings.
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
Taking a Picture
1. Go to Applications
and select Camera
.
2. By default, the Camera application stores pictures you take in the Palm
album on your device. If you have an expansion card inserted in your
device’s expansion card slot, the Camera application creates a Palm album
on the card and stores pictures there. To store the picture in a different
location, select the album pick list in the lower-right corner of the screen,
and then do one of the following:
䡲 Select <Album name> to store the picture in
the selected album. The storage location is
based on the location of the album (device or
expansion card).
䡲 Select New Albums to open a dialog box where
you can enter an album name and select the
storage location (device or expansion card).
3. (Optional) Adjust the zoom setting by pressing Up
to select 2x or pressing Down
to select 1x.
Album
Pick List
4. Point the lens on the back of your device at the
subject you want to photograph.
5. Press Center
to take the picture.
187
Pictures & Videos
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
6. Select one of the following buttons:
Saves the picture in the location you selected
in step 2.
Deletes the picture.
Lets you add a voice caption.
Opens a list of options for sending the picture:
䡲
䡲
䡲
Select Send with PictureMail to send the picture as part of a Picture Mail
message (see “Creating and Sending a Sprint PCS Picture Mail Message”
on page 148).
Select Send with Online Services to send the picture using one of the
available Sprint PCS Vision® Online Services (see “Using Online Services”
on page 158).
Select Upload to Online Albums to upload the picture to your online
album (see “Using Your Online Album” on page 200).
Recording a Video
1. Go to Applications
and select Camcorder
.
2. By default, the Camcorder application stores videos you record in the Palm
album on your device. If you have an expansion card inserted in your
device’s expansion card slot, the Camcorder application creates a Palm
album on the card and stores videos there. To store the video in a different
location, select the album pick list in the lower-right corner of the screen,
and then do one of the following:
188
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
䡲
䡲
Select <Album name> to store the video in the
selected album. The storage location is based
on the location of the album (device or
expansion card).
Select New Albums to open a dialog box where
you can enter an album name and select the
storage location (device or expansion card).
3. Adjust the position of your device until you see
the subject you want to record on the screen.
4. Press Center
Album
Pick List
to start recording.
5. After you finish recording, press Center
again to stop.
6. Select one of the following buttons:
Begins playback.
Saves the video in the location you selected
in step 2.
Deletes the video.
Opens a list of options for sending the video:
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
189
Pictures & Videos
Opens a dialog box where you can adjust the volume during playback.
䡲
䡲
䡲
Note:
190
Select Send with PictureMail to send the video as part of a Picture Mail
message (see “Creating and Sending a Sprint PCS Picture Mail Message”
on page 148).
Select Send with Online Services to send the video using one of the
available Sprint PCS Vision Online Services (see “Using Online Services”
on page 158).
Select Upload to Online Albums to upload the video to your online album
(see “Using Your Online Album” on page 200).
The video recording screen displays the approximate recording time you
have left, based on the space available on your device or expansion card.
Actual recording time may vary depending on how fast you are moving,
how many colors you are recording, and so on.
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
Customizing Your Camera Settings
You can customize the built-in camera’s settings for your Treo device.
1. Open Camera or Camcorder, and then open the menus
. If you are in
Camera view, the Photo Settings screen appears. If you are in Camcorder view,
the Video Settings screen appears.
2. Adjust any of the following settings:
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
191
Pictures & Videos
Effects sets the color palette for the current
picture or video. You can’t change an item’s
palette after you take the picture or video.
Prompt sound (Pictures only) sets the sound that
plays before you take the picture.
Shutter sound indicates whether a sound is
played when you take a picture.
Microphone (Videos only) turns the microphone
on and off so that you can record videos with or
without sound.
Resolution sets the default size for newly
captured pictures or videos.
Date stamp (Photos only) indicates whether the
date the picture is taken appears on your
pictures.
䡲
䡲
Review photos/videos indicates whether you can review pictures or
videos before saving them and how quickly they are automatically
saved.
Auto naming assigns a name to a series of pictures to be captured, such
as Seattle001, Seattle002, and so on.
3. Select Done.
192
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
Viewing Pictures and Videos
Viewing a Picture
In addition to viewing the pictures you capture with the built-in camera, you can
view pictures captured on many popular digital cameras or downloaded from the
Internet. Your device supports the following picture formats:
䢇 JPG
䢇 BMP
䢇 TIF
䢇 GIF
1. Go to Applications
and select Pics&Videos
.
2. Select the album that contains the picture you want to see.
3. Select the picture you want to view.
4. Press Right
or Left
to scroll to the next item in the album.
5. If the picture has a voice caption, select
6. Tap the photo or press Center
Tip:
to hear it.
to return to Thumbnail view.
You can also send a photo or video from Thumbnail view. Select the
photo or video, select the Send icon in the lower-right corner of the
screen, and then select the sending option you want.
193
Pictures & Videos
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
Viewing a Video
In addition to viewing the videos you capture with the built-in camcorder, you
can view videos captured on many popular digital video cameras.
1. Go to Applications
and select Pics&Videos
.
2. Select the album that contains the video you want to see.
3. Select the video you want to view. Playback begins automatically.
4. Hold down Right
Right
or Left
or Left to seek within the current video, or press
to scroll to the next item in the album.
5. Tap the video or press Center
to return to Thumbnail view.
Viewing a Slide Show
1. Go to Applications
and select Pics&Videos
.
2. Highlight or select the album you want to view.
3. (Optional) Open the menus
, select Options, and then select Auto-hide
Toolbar On.
4. Press Space
to start the slide show.
5. Tap the screen to return to the previous view.
Tip:
194
To set slide show options such as background music and transitions,
open the Album menu and select Slideshow Setting . Keep in mind that
background music overrides audio captions when you’re running a slide
show. Background music for a slide show also overrides any music that is
playing using the Pocket Tunes™ application on your device if you start a
slide show.
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
Organizing Pictures and Videos
After you take pictures and record videos, you can organize them into albums on
your device or use your online album (see “Using Your Online Album” on
page 200).
Creating Albums on Your Device
1. Go to Applications
and select Pics&Videos
.
2. Select Create New Album.
3. Enter an album name, and then select OK.
Tip:
If you have an expansion card inserted into your device’s expansion card
slot, you can choose to create the album on the card.
Arranging Albums
After you create an album, you can add items to or remove items from that
album.
1. Go to Applications
and select Pics&Videos
.
2. Select the album you want to organize.
From Thumbnail view, select the List/Thumbnail icon to the right of the
Camera icon in the lower-left corner of the screen to display the list of
albums.
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
195
Pictures & Videos
Tip:
3. To add pictures or videos to an album, select
.
To remove pictures or videos from an album, open the menus
Album, and then select Remove from album.
, select
4. Select the pictures or videos to add or remove, or select Select All to add or
remove the entire album. (A plus sign [+] indicates that you want to add the
item; an X indicates that you want to remove the item.)
5. Select Add or Remove.
Copying Pictures and Videos
You can copy pictures and videos into another album. You can also copy pictures
and videos between your device and an expansion card.
Tip:
Install the Palm® Files application from the Palm Software Installation
CD to easily browse and manage pictures and videos on an expansion
card.
1. Go to Applications
and select Pics&Videos
.
2. Select the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to copy.
Tip:
From Camera view or Camcorder view, select the icon in the lower-left
corner of the screen to display the list of albums.
3. Open the menus
.
4. Select Copy to from the Photo (or Video) menu.
196
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
5. Select the pictures or videos to copy, or select Select All to copy the entire
album. (A plus sign [+] appears next to selected items.)
Plus Sign (+)
Indicates That an
Item Is Selected
6. Select Copy.
7. Select the Copy items to pick list and select whether you want to copy the
selected items to your device or to an expansion card.
8. Select the Into album pick list and select the album you want to copy the
selected items to.
9. Select Copy.
Tip:
You can also move pictures and videos between albums. Open the Photo
(or Video) menu and select Move to. The remaining steps are the same
as those for copying pictures, but the command names display Move
instead of Copy.
197
Pictures & Videos
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
Saving a Picture as Wallpaper
You can select a picture to use as wallpaper for the Main view in the
Phone application.
1. Open the picture you want to save as wallpaper.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Save as Wallpaper.
4. When the confirmation message appears, confirm by selecting Yes, or
decline by selecting No.
Tip:
Press Phone to view the new wallpaper in the Phone application.
Adding a Picture to a Contact Entry
1. Open the picture you want to add to a contact.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Save as Contact.
4. Select the contact you want to add this picture to.
Rotating a Picture
1. Open the picture you want to rotate.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Rotate from the Photo menu.
4. Select the orientation.
198
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
Deleting a Picture or Video
1. Open the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to delete.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Delete from the Photo (or Video) menu.
4. Select the pictures or videos that you want to delete, or select Select All to
delete the entire album. (An X appears next to the selected items.)
5. Select Delete.
6. Select Delete to confirm the deletion.
Tip:
You can also highlight a picture or video in Thumbnail view, and then
press Backspace on your device keyboard to delete the highlighted item.
199
Pictures & Videos
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
Using Your Online Album
Uploading Pictures to Your Online Album
Your Sprint PCS Picture Mail account includes an online album on the Sprint PCS
Picture Mail Web site. You can use your online album to store and view pictures
from your device or from a computer with Internet access.
Note:
If you have not previously accessed your onlne album or used Sprint PCS
Picture Mail Online Services, you are prompted to create a password.
1. Go to Applications
and select Pics&Videos
.
2. Select the album that contains the picture(s) or
video(s) you want to upload.
3. Select
, and then select Upload to Online
Albums.
4. Select the picture(s) or video(s) you want to
upload.
5. Select Upload.
200
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
Working With Your Online Picture Mail Album
1. Go to Applications
and select Pics&Videos
.
2. Select the album pick list in the upper-right corner
of the screen, and then select Online.
3. Select the online album containing the items you
want to view.
4. Follow the steps described in “Viewing a Picture”
or “Viewing a Video” on page 194 to view a
picture or video.
Tip:
You can also download and play videos from your online album, and you
can listen to voice captions that are attached to pictures, too.
201
Pictures & Videos
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
Viewing Pictures and Videos on Your Computer
When you synchronize your smart device, your pictures and videos are copied to
your desktop computer. You can view pictures in JPEG format and videos in
MPEG-4 format (.3G2 file extension). You can email them to friends using your
desktop email application.
On a Windows computer, you can view and edit synchronized pictures and videos
in the Palm Media desktop application. Open Palm® Desktop software and click
the Media icon. You can refer to the Palm Desktop Online Help for information
about using the Palm Media desktop application.
Tip:
202
You can also view, download, and manage your pictures and videos
from your computer at www.sprint.com/picturemail.
Section 4A: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
S e c ti o n 4 B
Listening to Music
⽧
Setting Up Windows Media Player for MP3
⽧
Transferring MP3 Files From Your Computer
⽧
Transferring Music From a CD to Your Device
⽧
Listening to Music on Your Treo Device
Music
In This Section
You can listen to music through the speaker on the back of your Treo™ 700P smart
device, or through the included stereo headphones. To listen to music on your
device, you need to convert the music files into MP3 format using Windows
Media Player (Windows computers) or iTunes (Mac computers), and then transfer
the music files to your device or to an expansion card. After you transfer the
music files, you can play them using the Pocket Tunes™ application on your
device.
Important:
Mac users must transfer music files to an expansion card.
Section 4B: Listening to Music
203
Setting Up Windows Media Player for MP3
On a Windows computer, you need to set Windows Media Player settings to save
your music files in MP3 format in order for the files to be compatible with Pocket
Tunes.
1. Connect your device to your computer with the sync cable.
2. On your device, go to Applications
and select pTunes
.
3. On your computer, open Windows Media Player, and then click the full-screen
icon in the upper-right corner to maximize the window.
4. Click Tools, and then click Options.
5. Click the Rip Music tab, click the
Format pick list, and then select
mp3. Click OK.
6. Click Tools, and then click
Options.
7. Click the Devices tab, select
your Treo device from the
Devices list, and then click
Properties.
204
Select Your
Device
Click
Properties
Section 4B: Listening to Music
8. Click the Quality tab and
uncheck the Convert files as
required by this handheld
(recommended) box. Click Apply.
Uncheck
Box
9. Click OK, and then click OK
again.
Music
Setting Up iTunes for MP3
On a Mac, use iTunes (included with
OS X) to convert music from a CD to
MP3 format. For more information on
using the iTunes software, see the
documentation that came with your
Mac.
1. On your Mac, open iTunes.
2. Select Preferences.
3. Click the Advanced button at the top of the window, and then click
Importing.
4. Click the Import Using pop-up menu and select MP3 Encoder.
5. (Optional) Click the Setting pop-up menu and select Good Quality.
Section 4B: Listening to Music
205
Transferring MP3 Files From Your Computer
The Pocket Tunes software that comes with your device is compatible with the
popular MP3 audio file format. If your MP3 files are already on your computer’s
hard drive, you need to transfer them to your device to listen to them on your
device.
If an expansion card is inserted into the device, on a Windows computer,
Windows Media Player copies the MP3 files to the expansion card. If you don't
have an expansion card inserted, the MP3 files are copied to device memory.
If you are transferring MP3 files from a Mac computer, you must insert an
expansion card into the device. You cannot transfer MP3 files to device memory
from a Mac.
Important:
You must synchronize your device with your computer at least once
before you can transfer MP3 files from your computer.
1. Connect your Treo device to your computer with the USB sync cable.
2. On your device, go to Applications
and select pTunes
.
3. If you are transferring from a Mac computer, insert an expansion card into
your device. This step is optional for Windows users.
4. Do one of the following:
䡲
206
Windows. Open Windows Media Player on your
computer. Select the Sync tab, and then select Palm
Handheld from the drop-down list. Select Start Sync.
Section 4B: Listening to Music
䡲
The files are transferred to your device or to an expansion card
automatically; do not press the sync button on the sync cable.
Mac. Drag and drop the MP3 files onto the Send To Handheld droplet in
the Palm folder. Select your device name (username), the file name, and
the destination (card). Click OK. Synchronize your device with your
computer. Be patient; transferring music to an expansion card can take
several minutes.
You can also use a card reader accessory (sold separately) to transfer
MP3 files from your computer to your expansion card. Create a “Music”
folder in the root directory of the card, and store your MP3 files in this
folder.
Note:
Please note that there may be restrictions that prevent you from
downloading, viewing and/or copying a video or music file (for example,
DVD, CD, or MP3 file). You may also be prohibited from providing copies
of the video or music file to any third person. It is your responsibility to
ensure that you have obtained the legal right to use the video or music
file for personal use and to honor any restrictions imposed by the
original content providers.
Section 4B: Listening to Music
Music
Tip:
207
Transferring Music From a CD to Your Device
If your songs are on a CD and you want to listen to them on your device, you need
to convert them to MP3 format on your computer before you transfer the files to
your device.
On a Windows computer:
1. Open the Windows Media Player application.
2. Insert the music CD into your computer’s CD drive.
3. Select the Rip tab.
4. Select the tracks you want to rip from the CD.
5. Select Rip Music.
6. Transfer the MP3 files to your device as described in “Transferring MP3 Files
From Your Computer” on page 206.
On a Mac computer:
1. Open iTunes.
2. Insert the music CD into your computer’s CD drive.
3. Check the boxes next to the tracks that you want to convert to MP3.
4. Click the Import button in the upper-right corner of the iTunes window.
5. After the songs are imported, click the Eject Disk button in the lower-right
corner of the iTunes window.
6. Transfer the MP3 files to your device as described in “Transferring MP3 Files
From Your Computer” on page 206.
208
Section 4B: Listening to Music
Listening to Music on Your Treo Device
1. Go to Applications
and select pTunes
.
2. Do any of the following:
䡲
To play the current song, select Play
䡲
To play the next song, select Next Song
䡲
To play the previous song, select Previous Song
䡲
To play a different song, select Choose Songs
and select a
song from the list.
To adjust the volume during playback, press the Volume button on the
side of your device.
䡲
To pause playback, select Pause
Progress Indicator
.
.
Music
䡲
or press Space
.
.
Next Song
Play/Pause
Choose Songs
Volume
Previous Song
Tip:
You can also use the 5-way to navigate among songs, pause and resume
playback, and adjust the volume during playback.
Section 4B: Listening to Music
209
Pocket Tunes continues playing until it reaches the end of your list or until you
select Pause . Music continues to play even if you switch to another application
or turn off your screen. If you want to stop playing music when you exit Pocket
Tunes, open the Background Prefs menu, uncheck the Enable Background Playback
box, and then select OK.
Tip:
If you don’t hear anything when you play a song, make sure the Ringer
switch is set to Sound On. See “Silencing Sounds” on page 284 for more
information.
Creating a Playlist
If you want to play a group of songs in a particular
order, you can create a playlist.
1. Go to Applications
2. Open the menus
and select pTunes
.
.
3. Select Actions, and then select Manage Playlists.
4. Select New, and then enter a name for the
playlist.
5. Select Add Song. Select the songs you want to include on the playlist.
6. Select Save List.
To play songs from a playlist, open Pocket Tunes, select Choose Songs, and then
select Playlists. Select the playlist you want to play, and then select All.
210
Section 4B: Listening to Music
Editing a Playlist
1. Go to Applications
2. Open the menus
and select pTunes
.
.
3. Select Actions, and then select Manage Playlists.
4. Highlight the playlist you want to edit, and then select Edit.
䡲
䡲
䡲
To delete a song from the playlist, select the song and then
select Remove.
To add a song, select Add Song, check a song’s box, and then select Done.
To move a song up or down one slot, select a song and then select the
up or down arrow.
6. Select Save List.
Tip:
To delete a playlist, select Playlists, select Manage Playlists from the
Actions menu, select the playlist, and then select Delete List. Select Yes to
confirm the deletion.
Section 4B: Listening to Music
211
Music
5. Do any of the following:
212
Section 4B: Listening to Music
Section 4C
Watching Sprint TV
SM
In This Section
Accessing Streamed Media
⽧
Viewing Streamed Media
Sprint TV
⽧
SM
Section 4C: Watching Sprint TV
213
Accessing Streamed Media
The Sprint TV application enables you to view streamed audio and video media
from various channels on your Treo™ 700P smart device. You can choose from a
list of provided channels, or purchase additional channels so that you can
download and view the programs you want.
1. Go to Applications
and select Sprint TV
.
2. Navigate to the channel list you want as follows:
䡲
Note:
To go back one channel screen, select Back.
The Back option does not appear on the default channel screen.
䡲
To go back to the main channel list, select Home.
3. To stream audio or video content, select a
channel. The
icon indicates audio content;
the
icon indicates video content. The
icon
indicates that the channel contains multiple
content items. Select the channel to view all
items.
Note:
214
To view information about the selected channel or program, select Info.
Select Done on the Info screen when you have finished viewing the
information..
Section 4C: Watching Sprint TV
SM
4. (Optional) Select Stop
or press Center
to pause the connection to
the server before streaming begins. Select Play
again to resume streaming.
Tip:
or press Center
From a channel or folder screen, you can also use the keyboard to enter a
channel number, and then select OK to go to that channel.
Sprint TV
SM
Section 4C: Watching Sprint TV
215
Viewing Streamed Media
Once you connect to the server, playback begins immediately. Use the following
controls when viewing or listening to streaming media:
䢇
Select
䢇
Select
or press Center
to pause playback of
nonlive content such as videos on demand.
䢇
Select
or press Center
live content.
to stop playback of
䢇
Select
or press Center
after pausing.
to resume playback
䢇
Select
or press Left
highlighted.
䢇
Select
or press Right to view the channel list with the last channel
highlighted.
A few seconds after playback begins, the toolbar is hidden and you can view
the content on the full screen. Press Up
or Down
to display the toolbar;
press Up
or Down
again to hide the toolbar again.
Press the Volume button on the side of your device to adjust the volume.
䢇
䢇
216
to return to the channel list.
to view the channel list with the first channel
Section 4C: Watching Sprint TV
SM
Section 5
Your Mobile Organizer
218
S e c ti o n 5 A
Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
In This Section
Contacts
⽧
Calendar
⽧
Tasks
⽧
Memos
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
Organizer Features
⽧
219
Contacts
Contacts is where you enter information about people you know. You can access
this information from the Phone application to dial phone numbers and create
favorites, and from the Messaging and email applications to send messages.
When you create a contact, you can also assign a caller ID picture or ringtone to
that contact, so that you know when that person is calling.
If you have several contacts to enter, it’s more efficient to use Palm® Desktop
software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer and then synchronize
information between your Treo™ 700P smart device and your computer. For more
information, see “Synchronizing Information—The Basics” on page 33.
Note:
If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®, your contacts information (as
well as email and calendar information) synchronizes directly with your
company’s Exchange server. You retrieve contacts (and email and
calendar) updates from the server; they are not updated when you
synchronize directly with your computer. See “Getting Messages From
Your Corporate Microsoft Exchange Server Onto Your Device” on
page 141.
Adding a Contact
1. Press Phone
.
2. Select the Contacts favorite button.
Tip:
220
You can also open Contacts from Applications view.
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
3. Select New Contact.
4. Use the 5-way navigator
to move between
fields as you enter information.
5. (Optional) Do any of the following:
䡲
䡲
Tip:
䡲
Add a note to an entry: Select Note
.
䡲
Display additional fields for this contact: Select Plus
.
You can assign a ringtone to an entire category of contacts. For example,
use a special ringtone for categories such as Family, Work, or Golf
Buddies. Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner, select Edit
Categories, and then select the category. Select a ringtone on the Edit
Category screen.
6. To place the entry in a category or mark it private, select Details (see
“Working With Private Entries” on page 302 for more information).
7. To add a note to an entry, select Note
.
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
221
Organizer Features
䡲
Add a caller ID photo: Select the Picture box, and
then do one of the following:
⽧ Select Camera to take a picture and add it to
this contact when you save the picture.
⽧ Select Photos to add an existing picture to this contact.
Add a caller ID ringtone: Select the Ringtone pick list and select a ringtone
from the list to give incoming calls from this contact a distinctive ring.
Place the entry in a category or mark it private: Select Details (see “Working
With Private Entries” on page 302 for more information).
8. To display additional fields for this contact, select Plus
.
9. After you enter all the information, select Done.
Tip:
If you make an outgoing call or receive an incoming call that has caller ID
and the phone number is not associated with a contact in your Contacts
list, you can either create a new contact for that number or add the
number to an existing contact. See “Saving Phone Numbers” on page 70
for details.
Viewing or Changing Contact Information
1. In the Contacts list, begin entering one of the following for the contact you
want to view or edit:
䡲 First name (JOH for John).
䡲 Last name (SMI for Smith).
䡲 First initial and last name (JSM for John Smith).
2. Select the name of the entry you want to open.
3. Select Edit.
4. Make changes to the entry as necessary, and then select Done.
Deleting a Contact
1. Open the contact you want to delete.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Delete Contact on the Record menu.
4. Select OK.
222
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
Defining Your Business Card
1. Create a new contact with your own business card information.
2. Open the contact entry containing your business information.
3. Open the menus
.
4. Select Select Business Card on the Record menu.
After you define your business card, you can beam it to other Palm OS® devices. In
Contacts or in any Phone view, open the menus
on the Record menu.
and select Beam Business Card
Organizer Features
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
223
Calendar
Calendar is a powerful organizer application that helps you manage your
schedule. You can view your calendar by day, week, or month, or as an agenda list
that combines your list of tasks and email notifications with your appointments.
Schedule repeating meetings or block out a vacation by creating one event set to
repeat at an interval you specify. Color-code your appointments by category and
add notes with helpful information.
If you have several appointments to enter, it’s more efficient to use Palm Desktop
software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer and then synchronize
information between the Treo 700P smart device and your computer. For more
information, see “Synchronizing Information—The Basics” on page 33.
Note:
If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®, your calendar information
(as well as email and contacts information) synchronizes directly with
your company’s Exchange server. You retrieve calendar (and email and
contacts) updates from the server; they are not updated when you
synchronize directly with your computer. See “Getting Messages From
Your Corporate Microsoft Exchange Server Onto Your Device” on
page 141.
Displaying Your Calendar
䢇
224
Press Calendar
repeatedly to cycle through the various views:
䡲 Agenda View shows your daily schedule and
any items on your Tasks list that are overdue or
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
䢇
䢇
䢇
due today. If there’s room, Agenda view also shows your schedule for the
next dates that have events scheduled.
䡲 Day View shows your daily schedule one day at a time.
䡲 Week View shows your schedule for an entire week. The time frames are
based on the Start Time and End Time settings in Calendar Preferences.
䡲 Month View shows your schedule for a whole month.
From any Calendar view, open the Options menu and select Year View to view a
calendar for an entire year.
Tip:
You can customize your phone to display the most current Calendar
event on the Main view in the Phone application. Press Phone, open the
Options menu, and then select Phone Display Options. Check the Show
Calendar event box.
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
225
Organizer Features
From any Calendar view (except Agenda view), use the 5-way navigator
or
stylus to move to another day, week, month, or year (based on the
current view).
From any Calendar view (except Agenda view), select Go To, and then select a
date from the calendar.
Creating an Event
1. Press Calendar
2. Press Left
until Day view appears.
or Right
to select the desired day.
Selected Date
Selected Day
3. Select New.
4. Using the keyboard, enter a starting hour and minute for the event. (For
example, enter 545 for 5:45. Remember to press Option
numbers.)
before entering
5. Select the End Time box, and then select the ending hour and minute for the
event.
6. (Optional) To assign a time zone to the event, select the Time Zone pick list
and select a city in the time zone you want.
7. Select OK.
8. Enter a description for the event.
226
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
Time Zones and Events
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
227
Organizer Features
Here are some important points to keep in mind when assigning a time zone to
an event:
䢇 Palm Desktop software does not recognize time zones. If you sync with
Palm Desktop software, you can add time zones to your events, but the start
and end times do not change in Palm Desktop if you go to a different time
zone.
䢇 If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use the time zone feature, but you must
install the conduit that came with your Treo 700P smart device (that is, you
must install the desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD and
select to sync with Outlook) or a subsequent update on all the computers you
synchronize your device with. Chapura PocketMirror and other earlier
Microsoft Outlook conduits do not support time zones.
䢇 To automatically assign a time zone to your events, open the Options menu,
select Preferences, and check the New events use time zones box. All your new
events will be assigned to your local time zone, and you can change this
setting for individual events. In addition, if you sync with Outlook and you
select the time zone option on the Calendar conduit sync screen, then time
zones will sync for any new events you create in Outlook. Time zone settings
are not added to any events that you created before you set these time zone
settings.
䢇 If you want your events with time zones to stay at the same time in Calendar,
regardless of the time zone you are in, uncheck the Get time zone from mobile
network box on the Date & Time Preferences screen. If the box is checked, the
event time shifts if you travel to a different time zone. See “Setting the Date
and Time” on page 294 for information.
Adding an Alarm to an Event
1. In Calendar, select the event.
2. Select Details.
Number of Time
Units
Type of Time Units
3. Check the Alarm box, and then select the number of minutes, hours, or days
before the event you would like to receive the alarm.
Note:
The alarm for untimed events (see “Creating an Untimed Event” on
page 228) is defined by minutes, days, or hours before midnight of the
date of the event.
4. Select OK.
When an alarm goes off, an alert is also displayed on the Alert screen. Select an
alert’s description to jump to that item, or check the box to clear that alert. See
“Viewing and Using the Alert Screen” on page 103 for more information.
Creating an Untimed Event
An untimed event is an event that does not occur at a particular time of day—for
example, a holiday or anniversary.
228
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
1. Press Calendar
2. Press Left
until you are in Day view.
or Right
to go to the date of the
event.
3. Make sure that no times are highlighted.
4. Enter a description for the event. A diamond
appears next to the description of an untimed
event.
Scheduling a Repeating Event
1. Create an event, and then select it.
2. Select Details.
you need doesn’t appear on the list, select Other to define a custom
interval.)
4. For weekly events, select the day(s) the event is repeated; for monthly
events, select Day or Date to indicate the repeating method.
5. If the event has an ending date, select the End on pick list, select Choose
Date, and then select the ending date.
6. Select OK.
Tip:
To enter a birthday or anniversary, add the information to the person’s
Contacts entry and it automatically appears in your Calendar.
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
229
Organizer Features
3. Select the Repeat pick list, and then select a repeat interval. (If the interval
This Icon
Indicates a
Repeating
Event
Color-Coding Your Schedule
Use color-coding to quickly spot various types of events. For example, make your
appointments with family green, coworkers blue, and friends red. Follow these
steps to create a category and assign it a color code:
1. From Day view, select the event description or select an empty time slot.
2. Select Details.
3. Select the Category pick list, and then select Edit Categories.
4. Do one of the following:
䡲
䡲
To create a new category, select New and then enter a category name.
To add a color to an existing category, select a category, and then select
Edit.
5. Select the color you want to give this category, and then select OK.
6. (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add or edit more categories.
7. Select OK two more times.
Now that the category is set up, you can assign a specific event to this category.
See the next section for details.
230
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
Editing or Deleting an Event
Tip:
To save memory, you can purge your old events. Open the Record menu
and select Purge. Select the Delete Events Older Than pick list and select a
timeframe. Select OK.
1. Select the event you want to edit or delete.
2. Select Details.
3. In addition to the settings covered earlier in this chapter, you can also
䡲
䡲
Note
provides space for you to enter additional text.
Delete removes the event from your Calendar.
4. Select OK.
Tip:
If you synchronize with Microsoft Outlook and your events include other
people, a With field appears in the Details dialog box and your attendee
information appears in this field after you synchronize.
Customizing Display Options for Your Calendar
1. Open the menus
.
2. Select Options, and then select Display Options.
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
231
Organizer Features
change any of the following settings:
䡲 Date and Time display when the event takes place. Change these
settings to reschedule the event.
䡲 Location provides space for you to enter a description of where the event
takes place.
䡲 Category sets the color-coded category for this event.
3. Select the Default View pick list, and then select the view you want to see
when you open Calendar.
4. Select the Agenda box and set any of the
following Agenda view options:
䡲 Show Due Tasks displays tasks that are due
today and tasks that are overdue.
䡲 Show Messages displays the number of read
and unread email messages.
䡲 Background displays a favorite picture as the
Agenda view background. Check the
Background box, select the picture thumbnail, and then select a picture.
Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the
picture.
5. Select the Day box and set any of the following
Day view options:
䡲 Show Category List displays the category
pick list.
䡲 Show Time Bars activates the time bars that
appear in Day view. The time bars show the
duration of an event and illustrate event
conflicts.
䡲 Compress Day View controls how times appear in Day view. When
Compress Day View is unchecked, all time slots are displayed on the
screen. When it is checked, start and end times are displayed for each
event, but blank time slots toward the bottom of the screen disappear
to minimize scrolling.
232
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
䡲
Show Category Column displays the color-coded category marker
between the time and the description to indicate which category the
event is filed under.
6. Select the Month box and set any of the
Organizer Features
following Month view options:
䡲 Show Category List displays the category
pick list.
䡲 Timed Events displays events that are
scheduled for a specific time.
䡲 Untimed Events displays events that are
scheduled for a specific date but not a
specific time.
䡲 Daily Repeating Events displays events that are repeated every day.
7. Select OK.
Selecting Alarm Tones
1. Open the menus
.
2. Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences.
3. Select the Application pick list, and then select Calendar.
4. Select the Volume pick list, and then select the volume level.
5. Select the Vibrate pick list, and then select how you want your device to
vibrate for an event alarm.
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
233
6. Select any of the following:
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
Alarm Sound sets the tone played the first time
your alarm goes off.
Reminder Sound sets the tone played if an alarm
is not acknowledged and the alarm repeats
itself.
Repeat indicates how many times the alarm
repeats itself if it is not acknowledged.
Default Alarm sets the default number of minutes, hours, or days before
an event that the alarm goes off.
7. Select Done.
Tip:
234
You can also preview, delete, and send sounds that you use as alarms.
From the Sounds & Alerts Preferences screen, select Manage. To play a
sound, select it and press Center on the 5-way. To delete a sound, select
it and press Backspace, and to send a sound, select it and then select
Send.
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
Tasks
You can use the Tasks application to keep track of tasks you need to complete and
to keep a record of completed tasks.
Adding a Task
1. Go to Applications
and select Tasks
.
2. Select New to create a new task.
3. Enter a description of the task. (The text can be
longer than one line.)
Setting Task Priority, Due Date, and Other Details
1. Select the task to which you want to assign details.
2. Select Details.
3. Set any of the following:
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
Priority sets the Priority number for this task (1 is most important). You
can arrange your tasks based on the importance of each task.
Category assigns the task to a specific category.
Due Date sets the due date for the task. Select the Due Date pick list and
select a due date.
Alarm sets an alarm for this task.
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
235
Organizer Features
The Details dialog box enables you to assign a priority level, due date, category,
privacy flag, and note to each task.
䡲
䡲
䡲
Repeat indicates whether the task occurs at regular intervals and how
often it repeats. When you check off a repeating task, the next instance
of this task automatically appears in your task list.
Private indicates whether the task is private. Check this box to mark this
task private. See “Working With Private Entries” on page 302 for
additional information.
stores additional text you want to associate with the task.
4. Select OK.
Tip:
236
You can also set the priority by tapping the Priority number next to a task
in the Tasks list and then selecting a priority level from the list.
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
Checking Off a Task
䊳
Select the task you want to check off, and then
press Center
.
Organizing Your Tasks
In the Tasks list, select one of these options:
䢇 All displays all your tasks.
䢇 Date displays tasks that are due in a specific time
frame. You can select Due Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7 Days, or Past Due.
䢇 Category displays tasks that are assigned to the selected category. Select the
Category pick list to select a different category.
Overdue tasks have an exclamation point (!) next to the due date.
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
Organizer Features
Tip:
237
Deleting a Task
1. Select the task you want to delete.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Delete Task on the Record menu.
4. Select OK.
Tip:
To save memory, you can purge all completed tasks. Open the Record
menu, select Purge, and then select OK.
Customizing Tasks
The Tasks Preferences screen enables you to control the appearance of the Tasks
list screen.
1. In the Tasks list screen, open the menus
.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3. Set any of the following preferences:
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
238
Sort by indicates the order in which your tasks
appear in the list.
Show Completed Tasks displays tasks that you’ve
checked off.
Record Completion Date replaces the due date
with the completion date when you check off a
task.
Show Due Dates displays task due dates and inserts an exclamation
point (!) next to overdue tasks.
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
䡲
䡲
䡲
Show Priorities displays the priority setting for each task.
Show Categories displays the category for each task.
Alarm Sound sets the sound for the alarms you assign to your tasks.
4. Select OK.
Organizer Features
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
239
Memos
Memos are a great way to store notes on your Treo
device. Each memo can include 4,096 characters
of text.
Creating a Memo
1. Go to Applications
and select Memos
.
2. Enter the text that you want to appear in the
memo. (Press Return
lines in the memo.)
to move down to new
3. Select Done.
Tip:
You can assign categories to your memos. Open the memo you want to
change, select the category pick list at the top of the screen, and then
select a category.
Deleting a Memo
1. Select the memo you want to delete.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Delete Memo on the Record menu.
4. Select OK.
240
Section 5A: Using Your Device’s Organizer Features
S e c ti o n 5 B
Increasing Your Productivity
In This Section
⽧
Using the Documents Application to Work With Your Office Files
⽧
Voice Memo
⽧
World Clock
⽧
Calculator
Productivity
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
241
Using the Documents Application to Work With Your
Office Files
Tip:
The Palm Software Installation CD includes the Documents To Go®
desktop software. On your device, the companion applications for
Documents To Go is named Documents.
With the Documents application, you can take your important office information
with you. You can carry, create, view, and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files
directly on your device. You can also view, carry, and manage PowerPoint and PDF
files. For example, you can open email attachments, files you download with the
Web browser, and files stored on an expansion card—as long as the files are in a
supported format.
Tip:
Install the Palm® Files application from the Palm Software Installation
CD to easily browse and manage files on an expansion card.
If you install the Documents To Go desktop software (from the Palm Software
Installation CD), you can use Documents To Go to transfer files to your device
when you synchronize.
Note:
242
For complete information on the Documents To Go application, install it
from the Palm Software Installation CD, click the Documents To Go icon
on your computer, and then click Help; or go to www.dataviz.com.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
Here are a few more examples of what you can do with Documents:
䢇 Send and receive email attachments in Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat
file formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).
䢇 View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat files (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).
䢇 Create or edit a Word-compatible document or Excel-compatible spreadsheet
on your device, and then save it in the native DOC or XLS format.
䢇 Create a PowerPoint presentation on your computer, use the Documents To Go
desktop application to optimize the file for your device, and then sync the file
onto your device. View or edit the file on your device, and then sync again to
transfer the changes to the original PowerPoint file on your computer.
Note:
The Documents application does not support some editing functions,
such as multiple font sizes and spell check.
Opening a Document
1. Go to Applications
and select Documents
Productivity
In the Documents application, you can open and view
any Word, Excel, PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) file on
your device or on an expansion card that is inserted into
the expansion card slot.
.
2. Select the document you want from the list.
Tip:
When you are working on a file on your device, save it to your device or
your expansion card by opening the menus, selecting Save As from the
File menu, and then selecting the location where you want to save the
file.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
243
Voice Memo
Voice Memo provides a place for you to record and play back notes and other
important thoughts directly on your device.
Creating a Voice Memo
1. Press and hold the Side button on your device. Face your device and begin
speaking.
Note:
Your recording pauses automatically when you receive a call. If you
answer the call, recording stops and saves the voice memo. If you
have not finished recording, rerecord your memo after hanging up
from the call. If you ignore the call, press Record to resume recording.
2. After you finish recording, release the Side button. The memo is
automatically saved to your device.
3. (Optional) Enter a title for the memo.
Tip:
244
Alternately, open the Voice Memo application, press the Side button to
begin recording, and then press it again when you have finished
recording. If you are recording a long voice memo, you can begin
recording by opening Voice Memo and selecting New. Using this
method, you can press and hold Center on the 5-way to pause recording,
and release Center to resume recording.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
Listening to a Voice Memo
1. Go to Applications
and select Voice Memo
.
2. In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the voice memo
title and then press Center
memo begins to play.
to select it. The voice
3. To set the volume level, press the Volume button on
the side of your device or press Up
the 5-way
or Down
on
.
4. Press Center
to pause or stop playback.
To change a voice memo title, open the Voice Memo menu and select
Rename Memo.
Tip:
You can send a voice memo in an email message (see “Attaching Voice
Memos” on page 132). You can also use Bluetooth wireless technology
to send a voice memo to a nearby Bluetooth device (see “Sending Entries
Over a Bluetooth® Wireless Connection” on page 261).
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
Productivity
Note:
245
World Clock
World Clock displays the day and time in three cities anywhere around the globe.
Whether you’re traveling or staying at home, it’s easy to keep track of the best
times to reach your business associates, friends, and family in faraway places.
Setting Cities
World Clock shows the system date and time above the world map. If you
selected the option to get the date and time from the mobile network (see “Setting the Date and Time” on page 294), the Nationwide Sprint PCS® Network automatically updates the time display to match the local time when you travel.
Below the world map you can view the time in two
other cities. If you travel a lot, you may want to select
your home city as one of these two cities, so that you
always know what time it is at home.
1. Go to Applications
and select World Clock
.
2. Select a city pick list, and then select a city in the
same time zone.
Adding Cities
If the city you want to display is not in the predefined list, you can add it.
1. Select a city pick list, and then select Edit List.
2. Select Add.
3. Select a location in the same time zone as the city you want to add, and
then select OK.
246
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
4. Enter the name of the city.
5. Select Location, select Map, select the location of the city, and then
select OK.
6. If the city is not on Daylight Saving Time, uncheck this box. If Daylight
Saving Time is observed, enter Start and End dates.
7. Select OK.
Setting an Alarm
The next time you travel, don’t rely on a hotel alarm clock to get you to that
important meeting; use your device instead. World Clock includes a built-in alarm
feature that you can use as a travel alarm.
Tip:
Make sure the Ringer switch is set to Sound On, so that you can hear the
alarm.
1. Select Off in the upper-right corner.
2. Select the time you want the alarm to sound.
Tip:
Productivity
3. Select OK.
To customize the alarm sound and volume, open the Options menu and
select Alarm Preferences.
World Clock Tips
䢇
䢇
Run your stylus over the map to see the time in other cities.
The shadow over the map represents nighttime moving across the globe.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
247
Calculator
The Calculator application includes a basic calculator, plus an advanced calculator
with scientific, financial, and conversion functions
Switching Between Basic and Advanced Calculator Modes
1. Go to Applications
2. Open the menus
and select Calc
.
.
3. Select Options, and then select Advanced Mode or Basic Mode.
Basic Mode
Tip:
248
Advanced Mode
In Basic Mode, you can also press Right on the 5-way to switch to
Advanced Mode. In Advanced Mode, press Right on the 5-way to cycle
between functions, and press Left on the 5-way to return to Basic Mode.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
Selecting Functions in Advanced Calculator Mode
1. Switch to Advanced Calculator Mode (see the preceding procedure).
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select the function you want to use:
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
4. Open the menus
.
5. Select Pref, and then select the decimal display format: Float, Fixed (x), Sci (x),
or Eng (x).
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
249
Productivity
䡲
Math provides advanced mathematical functions such as exponents,
roots, and logarithms.
Trig provides trigonometric functions such as sine, cosine, tangent,
and variants.
Finance provides financial calculator functions such as APR and
amortization.
Logic displays hexadecimal characters on the keypad, plus logic
functions such as And, Not, Or, and Xor.
Statistics provides statistical functions such as sum, factorial, and
random number generator.
Weight/Temp provides weight and temperature conversions for metric
and English values.
Length provides length conversions for metric and English values.
Area provides area conversions for metric, traditional, and
English values.
Volume provides volume conversions for metric and English values.
6. Open the menus
.
7. Select Pref, and then select the number display format: Degrees, Radians,
or Grads.
Tip:
To access a list of mathematical constants, such as Avogadro’s number
or the speed of light, select Con.
Storing and Recalling Numbers in Advanced Mode
250
䊳
To store a number in one of ten memory slots, select Sto.
䊳
To recall a stored number, select Rcl.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
Section 6
Managing Your Information
and Settings
252
S e c ti o n 6 A
Managing Files and Applications
In This Section
⽧
Using Find
⽧
Installing Applications
⽧
Removing Applications
⽧
Viewing Application Information
⽧
Sending Information Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
⽧
Beaming Information
⽧
Synchronizing Information—Advanced
⽧
Using Expansion Cards
Managing Files
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
253
Using Find
The Find feature locates any text in the built-in applications and databases and in
some third-party applications. The Find feature searches for the group of
characters you specify, including characters that are part of a word. Find is not
case-sensitive, and it locates any word that begins with the text you enter. For
example, entering plan finds planet but not airplane.
1. On any screen press Option
+ Shift/Find
to open the Find dialog box.
2. Enter the text you want to find.
3. Select OK to start the search.
4. In the search results, select the text you want to
review, or select Find More to continue the search.
254
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
Installing Applications
Your Treo™ 700P smart device comes with several built-in and ready-to-use
applications. You can also install additional applications, such as business
software, games, and more. The Palm Software Installation CD includes several
bonus software applications, and you can purchase other third-party Palm OS®
applications as well. To learn about applications you can add to your device, go to
www.palm.com/mytreo700pSprint.
The instructions in this section tell you how to install basic PRC (Palm OS
application) and PDB (Palm OS database) files on your Treo device. Some Palm OS
software uses an installer or wizard to guide you through the process. For details,
consult the documentation that came with the software.
Installing Bonus Software From the CD
The Palm Software Installation CD includes several bonus software applications
that you can install on your device. You can install these applications when you
install the desktop software, or you can install them later.
1. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD into the CD drive on your
computer.
2. Click Install bonus software.
3. Click the name of the application you want to install.
5. (Optional) Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install additional applications.
6. Synchronize your device with your computer to install the application(s) on
your device.
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
255
Managing Files
4. Click Install (on the right side of the screen).
Installing Applications From the Internet
You can use the Web browser on your device to install Palm OS files (PRC or PDB)
directly from the Internet. When you wirelessly download a PRC or PDB file, it is
automatically installed on your device. If a file is compressed (ZIP or SIT files), you
need to download it to your computer and expand the file before installing it on
your device.
1. Open the Web browser (see “Viewing a Web Page” on page 160).
2. Go to the page that contains the link to the application you want to
download.
3. Press Left
Center
or Right
to highlight the link to the file, and then press
to initiate the download process.
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to accept and install the application.
Installing Applications From a Computer
To install an application from a computer, you must first install Palm® Desktop
software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your Treo 700P
smart device.
When you download an application to your computer, it is probably in a
compressed format such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is compressed, you need to
use a decompression utility on your computer, such as WinZip or Allume StuffIt
Expander, before you install the application on your device.
256
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
1. On a Windows computer, drag and drop the
application file(s) onto the Palm™ Quick Install icon
on the Windows desktop.
On a Mac computer, drag and drop the application
file(s) onto the Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm
folder.
2. Select your device name from the User list, and then click OK.
3. Synchronize your device with your computer to install the application(s) on
your device.
Tip:
You can open a window that lets you select whether to install files on
your device or on an expansion card. On a Windows computer, doubleclick the Palm Quick Install icon. On a Mac computer, open the HotSync
menu and select Install Handheld files.
Getting Help With Third-Party Applications
If you encounter a problem with a third-party application (such as an error
message), contact the application’s author or vendor. For general troubleshooting
of third-party applications, see “Third-Party Applications” on page 347.
Managing Files
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
257
Removing Applications
If you decide that you no longer need an application or you want to free up
memory, you can remove applications from your device or from an expansion
card. You can remove only applications, patches, and extensions that you install;
you cannot remove the built-in applications that reside in the ROM portion of
your Treo device. These applications appear with a lock icon
1. Go to Applications
next to them.
.
2. If you want to remove an application from an expansion card, insert the
card into your device.
3. Open the menus
.
4. Select Delete on the App menu.
5. Select the Delete From pick list and select the
location of the application you want to remove:
Phone or Card.
6. Select the application that you want to remove.
7. Select Delete.
8. Synchronize to remove the application from the
Backup folder on your computer.
Tip:
258
Applications deleted from your device are kept on your computer in the
Archive folder of your user folder. If you’re having trouble locating your
user folder, see “I Can’t Find My User Folder” on page 322.
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
Manually Deleting Applications From Your Computer
If an application you delete reappears on your device, you may need to manually
delete it from your computer.
1. Locate your Backup folder on your computer.
䡲
䡲
䡲
Windows: C:\Program Files\Palm\<Device Name>.
Mac: Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\<Device Name>.
If you upgraded from a previous version of Palm Desktop, your backup
folder may be located in the palmOne or Handspring folder.
2. If you find a PRC or PDB file for the application you just removed, delete the
file from the Backup folder.
3. Delete the file from your device again.
Managing Files
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
259
Viewing Application Information
The Info screens display basic statistics about the applications on your
Treo device.
1. Go to Applications
2. Open the menus
.
.
3. Select Info on the App menu.
4. At the bottom of the screen, select the type of
information you want to view:
䡲 Version displays the version numbers of your
applications.
䡲 Size displays the size (in kilobytes) of your
applications and information.
䡲 Records displays the number of entries in your
applications.
5. Scroll to the application you want to see information about.
6. Select Done.
260
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
Sending Information Using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology
Sending Entries Over a Bluetooth® Wireless Connection
In most applications you can send an individual entry or item such as a contact or
a picture. You can also send all the entries in a category, such as all contacts in the
Business category.
1. Go to Applications
and select Bluetooth
.
2. Select Bluetooth On.
3. Go to Applications
and open the application containing the information
you want to send.
4. Select the entry or category you want to send.
5. Open the menus
.
6. Select Send from the leftmost menu.
7. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
8. Select the receiving device(s) on the Discovery Results screen, and then
select OK.
1. Go to Applications
and select Bluetooth
Managing Files
Sending an Application Over a Bluetooth Wireless Connection
.
2. Select Bluetooth On.
3. Go to Applications
.
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
261
4. Open the menus
.
5. Select Send from the App menu.
6. Select the Send From pick list and select whether the application you want
to send is located on your device or on an expansion card.
7. Select the application you want to transfer. You cannot send an item that
has a lock
next to it.
8. Select Send.
9. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
10. Select the receiving device(s) on the Discovery Results screen, and then
select OK.
Receiving Information Over a Bluetooth Wireless Connection
1. Go to Applications
and select Bluetooth
.
2. Select Bluetooth On.
3. Select the Visibility pick list and select one of the following:
䡲
䡲
262
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list
to request a connection with your device. Your device remains
accessible to other devices until you turn this option off.
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device
list to request a connection with your device during the next two
minutes. Your device reverts to the Hidden setting and becomes
inaccessible to other devices after two minutes.
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
4. Use the other device to discover your Treo device and send information to it:
䡲
See the other device’s documentation to learn how to discover and send
information over a Bluetooth wireless connection.
䡲
If the Ringer switch is set to the Sound On
position, your Treo device
beeps to notify you of the connection and then prompts you to accept
the information. Select a category or expansion card to file the item. If
you don’t select a category, the item goes into the Unfiled category.
5. Select Yes to receive the information or No to refuse it.
Tip:
As a security measure, your Treo device does not accept any information
unless you select Yes to receive the information. To protect your
information, do not accept any information from an unknown sender.
Managing Files
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
263
Beaming Information
Your Treo 700P smart device is equipped with an IR (infrared) port that enables
you to beam information to another Palm OS device with an IR port. The IR port is
located on the top of your device, between the Ringer switch and the antenna,
behind the small dark shield.
IR Port
For best results, the path between the two devices must be clear of obstacles, and
both devices must be kept stationary. If you have difficulty beaming, shorten the
distance and avoid bright sunlight.
Tip:
If you beam a bookmark or a saved page from the Web browser, it beams
the URL, not the contents of that page.
Beaming an Entry
You can beam an individual entry or item such as a contact or a picture. You can
also beam all the entries in the selected category, such as all the contacts in the
Business or Family category.
264
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
1. Select the entry or category you want to beam. (You cannot beam an item
that has a lock
2. Open the menus
next to it.)
.
3. Select one of the following on the Record menu:
䡲
䡲
Beam sends an individual entry.
Beam Category sends all entries in the current category.
4. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port on your Treo
device directly at the IR port of the receiving device.
Managing Files
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
265
5. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue using your Treo device.
Tip:
You can beam your business card. From the Main view in the Phone
application, open the menus, and then press M.
Beaming an Application
Not all applications can be beamed. A lock icon
next to applications that cannot be beamed.
1. Go to Applications
2. Open the menus
appears on the Beam screen
.
.
3. Select Beam on the App menu.
4. Select the Beam From pick list and select whether the application you want
to beam is located on your Treo device or on an expansion card.
5. Select the application you want to transfer, and then select Beam.
6. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port on your Treo
device directly at the IR port of the receiving device.
7. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue using your Treo device.
Note:
266
Please note that there may be restrictions that prevent you from
transferring copies of an application to a third party. It is your
responsibility to ensure that you have obtained the legal right to
provide a copy to the third party and to honor any restrictions imposed
by the software licensors.
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
Receiving Beamed Information
1. Turn on your screen.
2. Select the beam command on the transmitting device.
3. Point the IR port on your Treo device directly at the IR port of the
transmitting device to open the Beam Status dialog box.
4. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, select a category or expansion
card. (If you don’t select a category, the item goes in the Unfiled category.)
5. Select Yes to receive the information or No to refuse it.
Managing Files
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
267
Synchronizing Information—Advanced
Changing Which Applications Sync
By default, information from Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Pics&Videos, and Tasks
is updated each time you synchronize your device with Palm Desktop software or
Microsoft Outlook. You can change which applications synchronize. For example,
if you don’t use the Memos application and you want to speed up
synchronization, you can turn off synchronization for Memos.
Tip:
Windows If you set up your device to sync with Outlook, see the
online Outlook synchronization Help to learn how to change which
applications synchronize. Click the HotSync manager icon in the taskbar
in the lower-right corner of your computer screen, and then select
Custom to view the list of applications that sync with Outlook.
On a Windows computer:
1. Click the HotSync manager icon
in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
your screen.
2. Select Custom.
3. Select your device name from the drop-down list at the top of the screen.
4. Select the application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off,
and then click Change.
5. Do one of the following:
䡲
268
Select Synchronize the files to turn on synchronization for an application.
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
䡲
Tip:
Select Do nothing to turn off synchronization for an application that
currently synchronizes (for example, to turn off synchronization for
Memos if you do not use that application).
Select one of the two overwrite options if you want the information in
one location (device or computer) to completely replace the
information in the other location for that application. For example, if
the Calendar information on your device is accurate but the information
on your computer has become corrupted, select Handheld overwrites
desktop for the Calendar application to have your device information
replace your computer information. Note that “handheld” refers to your
device and “desktop” refers to your computer.
6. (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each application for which you want to
7. (Optional) To keep this synchronization setting on an ongoing basis, check
the Set as default box. If you do not check this box, the option you select
applies only the next time you synchronize. Thereafter, information is
updated according to the default setting for that application.
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
269
Managing Files
turn synchronization on or off.
8. Click OK, and then click Done.
On a Mac computer:
1. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon
in the Palm folder.
2. From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings.
3. From the User pop-up menu, select your device name.
4. Select the application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off,
and then click Conduit Settings.
5. Do one of the following:
䡲
䡲
270
Select Synchronize the files to turn on synchronization for an application.
Select Do nothing to turn off synchronization for an application that
currently synchronizes (for example, to turn off synchronization for
Memos if you do not use that application).
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
Tip:
Select one of the two overwrite options if you want the information in
one location (device or computer) to completely replace the
information in the other location for that application. For example, if
the Calendar information on your device is accurate but the information
on your computer has become corrupted, select Handheld overwrites
Macintosh for the Calendar application to have your device information
replace your computer information. Note that “handheld” refers to your
device.
6. (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each application for which you want to
turn synchronization on or off.
7. (Optional) To keep this synchronization setting on an ongoing basis, click
Make Default. If you do not select this button, the option you select applies
only the next time you synchronize. Thereafter, information is updated
according to the default setting for the application.
8. Click OK, and then close the Conduit Settings screen.
Setting Up a Bluetooth Connection for Synchronization
If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can
synchronize wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection. When you synchronize using
your device’s Bluetooth wireless feature, you don’t need your cable. This is
especially useful if you travel with a laptop enabled with Bluetooth wireless
technology.
Managing Files
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
271
1. Go to Applications
and select Bluetooth
.
2. Select On.
3. Enter a device name for your Treo device. This is the
name that appears on the other Bluetooth device’s
screen when it connects to your Treo device.
4. Select Setup Devices.
5. Select HotSync Setup.
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to create a
partnership between your Treo device and your
computer. In some cases you may need to perform
setup steps on your computer before you can
complete this step. Check your computer’s
documentation for specific setup instructions.
7. After you finish the HotSync Setup, select Done to
return to Applications view.
You’re now ready to sync your Treo device with your Bluetooth computer.
272
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
Synchronizing Over a Bluetooth Connection
1. Go to Applications
and select HotSync
.
2. Select Local.
3. Select the pick list below the HotSync icon, and
then select the name of the PC you set up for
Bluetooth synchronization (see “Setting Up a
Bluetooth Connection for Synchronization” on
page 271).
4. Select the HotSync icon
on your device.
When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your device
screen. Be patient; synchronization may take a few minutes.
Synchronizing Over an Infrared Connection
When you synchronize using your device’s IR port, you don’t need your cable. This
is especially useful if you travel with an IR-enabled laptop.
manager is active when its icon
screen.
appears in the lower-right corner of your
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
273
Managing Files
Your computer must include the following:
䢇 Your computer must have an enabled IR port and driver, or an IR device that is
attached to it. Check your computer’s documentation to see if the computer
supports IR communication.
䢇 HotSync manager must be active. On a Windows computer, you know HotSync
On a Windows computer:
1. On your computer, click the HotSync manager icon
in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your
screen. Make sure that Infrared is selected.
2. On your device, go to Applications
HotSync
and select
.
3. Select Local.
4. Select the pick list below the HotSync icon and
select IR to a PC/Handheld.
5. Position the IR port of your device within a few inches of the IR port of your
computer.
6. Select the HotSync icon
on your device.
When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your device
screen. Be patient; synchronization may take a few minutes.
On a Mac computer:
1. Double-click the HotSync manager icon
in the Palm folder.
2. From the HotSync Controls tab, select Enabled.
3. Click the Connection Settings tab, and then check the On box next to IR port.
4. Close the HotSync Software Setup screen.
5. On your device, go to Applications
and select HotSync
.
6. Select Local.
274
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
7. Select the pick list below the HotSync icon, and select IR to a PC/Handheld.
8. Position the IR port of your device within a few inches of the IR port of your
computer.
9. Select the HotSync icon
on your device.
When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your device
screen. Be patient; synchronization may take a few minutes.
Note:
If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®, your email, contacts, and
calendar information synchronize directly with your company’s
Exchange server. This information synchronizes wirelessly with the
server; it is not updated when you synchronize directly with your
computer. See “Getting Messages From Your Corporate Microsoft
Exchange Server Onto Your Device” on page 141. Your tasks and memos
continue to synchronize with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft
Outlook, depending on which desktop application you use.
Managing Files
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
275
Using Expansion Cards
The expansion slot on your Treo device enables you to add SD cards and
MultiMediaCard cards to extend the storage capacity of your device. For example,
SD cards and MultiMediaCard cards can store the following:
䢇 Pictures
䢇 MP3 audio files
䢇 Email attachments
䢇 Games
䢇 eBooks
䢇 Microsoft Office files
䢇 Adobe Acrobat files
䢇 Applications
䢇 Databases
Your Treo device is also compatible with SDIO cards, which let you add
accessories, such as a presentation module, to your device.
Although expansion cards are sold separately, your device includes a dummy,
nonfunctional card inside the expansion slot to keep out dust and other debris.
When you’re not using an expansion card, reinsert the dummy card to keep the
expansion card slot clean.
Tip:
276
SD cards are faster than MultiMediaCard cards for reading and writing
information.
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
Inserting and Removing Expansion Cards
If the Ringer switch is set to the Sound On
position, you hear a confirmation
tone when you insert or remove an expansion card.
1. Press down and release the dummy card.
2. After you feel the expansion slot eject the dummy card, remove the card
from the expansion slot.
3. Hold your device with the screen facing you, and hold the card with the
label facing you. (The notch on the card should be in the lower-left corner
next to the antenna.)
Managing Files
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
277
4. Insert the card into the expansion slot until you feel the card lock into place.
Notch
278
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
Opening Applications on an Expansion Card
After you insert an expansion card into the expansion
card slot, you can open any of the applications stored
on the expansion card.
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion
slot. Applications view automatically appears.
2. Select the icon for the application you want
to open.
3. Press Center
to open the application.
Accessing Items Stored on an Expansion Card
When an expansion card contains items such as pictures or songs, you can access
those items directly from the card.
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. Applications view
automatically appears.
2. Select the category pick list in the title bar, and then select All.
3. Select the icon for the application in which you want to open the item. For
example, to view a picture, select Pics&Videos.
Tip:
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
Managing Files
Install the Palm® Files application from the Palm Software Installation
CD to easily browse and manage files on an expansion card.
279
Copying Applications Between an Expansion Card and Your Device
You can copy applications between your Treo device and your expansion card.
Tip:
Before you copy an application to an expansion card, make sure that it is
compatible with Palm OS software version 5.4.5 or later. Some
applications do not work with expansion cards and do not allow you to
store files in a location that is separate from the application.
1. Make sure the card is not write-protected. (For details, see the instructions
that came with your card.)
2. Go to Applications
3. Open the menus
.
.
4. Select Copy on the App menu.
5. Select the Copy To pick list and select the
destination: <card name> or Phone.
6. Select the From pick list and select the location
of the application you want to copy: <card name>
or Phone.
7. Highlight the application you want to copy.
8. Select Copy.
Tip:
280
You can install an application directly to an expansion card instead of
copying it from your device’s main memory. See “Installing Applications”
on page 255 for details.
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
Viewing Expansion Card Information
The Card Info application displays general information
about the expansion card that is currently in the
expansion slot, and it enables you to rename and
format a card.
䢇
Go to Applications
and select Card Info
.
Renaming an Expansion Card
If you change the contents of an expansion card, you
may at some point want to rename the card to better
match its contents.
1. Make sure the card is not write-protected. (For details, see the instructions
that came with your card.)
2. Insert the expansion card into the expansion slot. Applications view
automatically appears.
3. Select the category pick list at the top of the screen, and then select All.
4. Select Card Info
.
5. Open the menus
.
6. Select Rename Card on the Card menu.
Managing Files
7. Enter a new name for the card.
8. Select OK.
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
281
Formatting an Expansion Card
Formatting an expansion card is similar to formatting a disk on a computer.
When you format an expansion card, you erase all the information stored on the
card and return it to a blank state.
1. Make sure the card is not write-protected. (For details, see the instructions
that came with your card.)
2. Insert the card into the expansion slot. Applications view
automatically appears.
3. Select the category pick list at the top of the screen, and then select All.
4. Select Card Info
.
5. Open the menus
.
6. Select Format Card on the Card menu.
7. Enter a new name for the card.
8. Select OK.
282
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
S e c ti o n 6 B
Customizing
Customizing Your Device
In This Section
⽧
Setting System Sounds
⽧
Adjusting the Display and Appearance
⽧
Changing the Applications Settings
⽧
Customizing Device Buttons
⽧
Setting the Date and Time
⽧
Optimizing Power Settings
⽧
Locking Your Device and Information
⽧
Using Connection Settings
⽧
Purchasing Accessories for Your Device
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
283
Setting System Sounds
Silencing Sounds
You can immediately silence all alerts, ringtones, music that plays through the
built-in speaker, and system sounds by sliding the Ringer switch to the Sound Off
position. This does not, however, mute the audio during a phone call.
1. Slide the Ringer switch to the Sound Off
position. Your device vibrates
once to let you know that you’ve turned sounds off.
2. To hear all sounds again, slide the Ringer switch to the Sound On
position.
When you slide the Ringer switch back to the Sound On
previous sound settings.
Sound On
Tip:
284
position, it restores the
Sound Off
Your device includes a silent alarm that can vibrate even when the Ringer
switch is set to Sound Off. For information on setting the vibrate option,
see the section on setting alert tones in the chapters that describe the
individual applications.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
Setting System Volume Levels
Tip:
If the Ringer switch is set to the Sound Off position, the ringer setting
overrides the sound settings and all sounds are turned off.
1. Go to Applications
and select Sounds
.
2. Select the Application pick list, and then select
System.
3. Select the System Volume and Game Volume pick
lists, and then select the volume levels.
4. Select Done.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
285
Customizing
You can set the volume level for system sounds, such as the tone that plays when
you synchronize.
Adjusting the Display and Appearance
Adjusting the Brightness
Depending on the lighting conditions in which you’re using your device, you may
need to adjust the brightness of the screen and keyboard backlight.
1. Press Option
, and then press Backlight
.
Backlight
2. Press Left
and Right
to adjust the brightness.
3. Select Done.
Tip:
286
To automatically set the brightness to the low setting, press Option, and
then press Menu.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
Changing the Screen Font
1. Open the application in which
you want to change the font.
2. Open the menus
Small
Small
Bold
Large
Large
Bold
.
3. Select Options, and then
select Font.
4. Select a font style. (In the Web
browser, select the Font size pick list and select Large or Small.)
5. Select OK.
Tip:
You can also change the text size in the VersaMail® application. See the
User Guide for the VersaMail Application.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
287
Customizing
You can change the screen font in Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Sprint PCS
PictureMail®, Tasks, and the Web browser. The font styles may vary between
applications, and some applications may offer fewer choices.
Setting Display Formats
Formats Preferences enable you to select number conventions based on
geographic regions. For example, in the United Kingdom, time often is expressed
using a 24-hour clock. In the United States, time is expressed using a 12-hour
clock with an AM or PM suffix. Many of the built-in applications on your Treo™
700P smart device use the Formats Preferences settings.
1. Go to Applications
and select Prefs
.
2. Select Formats.
3. Set any of the following preferences:
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
Preset to sets the standard number
conventions for your country. When you
select a country, the other Formats
Preferences are automatically set to that
country’s conventions. You can also edit each
option individually.
Time sets the time format. Select HH:MM to display a 24-hour clock.
Date sets the date format.
Week starts sets the first day of the week (usually Sunday or Monday).
Numbers sets the format for numbers with decimal points and commas.
4. Select Done.
288
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
Aligning the Screen
1. Go to Applications
and select Prefs
.
2. Select Touchscreen.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to tap the screen
where indicated.
4. Select Done.
Changing the System Color Scheme
1. Go to Applications
and select Prefs
.
2. Select Color Theme.
3. Select a color scheme from the list.
4. Select Done.
Tip:
You can also set the wallpaper for the Main view in the Phone
application (see “Customizing the Main View in the Phone Application”
on page 92) and the background for Agenda view in Calendar (see
“Customizing Display Options for Your Calendar” on page 231).
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
289
Customizing
Occasionally, your device screen may need to be readjusted. If this occurs, you
may see the wrong feature being activated when you tap the screen. To fix the
problem, you can realign the screen any time.
Changing the Applications Settings
You can change the Applications settings on your device so that you can easily
access the applications you use most often. You can arrange and display your
applications by category, reassign the buttons on your device, and select default
applications for specific tasks.
Arranging Applications by Category
You can assign an application to a category and then display a specific category of
applications in Applications view.
1. Go to Applications
2. Open the menus
.
.
3. Select Category on the App menu.
4. Select the pick list next to each application and select a category.
5. Select Done.
Tip:
290
To create a new category, select the category pick list and select Edit
Categories. Select New, and then enter the category name. Select OK to
close the dialog box, and then select OK again.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
Displaying Applications by Category
䢇
䢇
Press Applications
repeatedly to cycle through all your categories.
Select the category pick list at the top of the screen and select the category
you want to display. Select All to display all of your applications.
Selecting the Applications Display
By default, Applications view displays each application as an icon. As an
alternative, you can view a list of applications. The list view is particularly useful
when you have so many applications in a category that the applications fill up
more than one screen.
1. Go to Applications
2. Open the menus
.
.
3. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
4. Select the View By pick list, and then select List.
5. Select OK.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
291
Customizing
Do one of the following:
Customizing Device Buttons
Reassigning Buttons
With Buttons Preferences you can select which applications are associated with
the quick buttons and the Side button on your device. You can assign a primary
and secondary application to each of the three quick buttons that open an
application.
Tip:
We recommend that you keep the primary button assignments on the
factory settings until you become comfortable with the features of your
device. If you do change the primary button assignments, remember
that the instructions in this guide and in the other help features refer to
the original button settings.
1. Go to Applications
and select Prefs
.
2. Select Buttons.
3. Select the pick list next to the icon of the button
you want to reassign, or select the Option
+
Button combination you want to reassign, or
select the Press + Hold Side button pick list, and
then select an application.
4. Select Done.
Tip:
292
You can also select HotSync to choose an application to open with the
sync button on the sync cable. To restore all of the buttons and key
combinations to their factory settings, select Default.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
Changing Default Applications
1. Go to Applications
and select Prefs
.
2. Select Default apps.
3. Select each pick list, and then select the
application you want to associate with that
function.
4. Select Done.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
293
Customizing
Sometimes one application looks for another application to handle information
(for example, a mail application might open a browser when you select a link in
an email message). Your device comes with a set of predefined applications to
handle email, messaging, and browser requests from other applications. If you
have more than one application to handle these requests on your device, you can
specify which application you want to use for each function.
Setting the Date and Time
By default, your device synchronizes the date, time, and time zone with the
Nationwide Sprint PCS® Network when your device is on and you are inside a
coverage area. Date & Time Preferences let you manually set the date, time, and
time zone for your device.
Note:
You can also add time zones to events you create in Calendar. See
“Creating an Event” on page 226 for information.
1. Go to Applications
and select Prefs
.
2. Select Date & Time.
3. To manually set the date and time, uncheck the
Get date & time from mobile network box. Select
the Date field and select the date, and then select
the Time field and select the time.
4. To manually set the time zone, uncheck the Get
time zone from mobile network box. If you uncheck the Get date & time box,
the Get time zone box is unchecked by default. Select the Set Location pick
list, and then select a city in your time zone.
Note:
294
If you uncheck the Get date & time box, the Get time zone box is disabled
and you cannot have the Nationwide Sprint PCS Network automatically
set the time zone. However, you can choose to have the network set the
date and time while you manually set the time zone.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
If a city in the same time zone is not on the list, select Edit List, select Add,
select a city in your time zone, and then select OK. If necessary, modify
any of the settings in the Edit Location dialog box, and then select OK.
Customizing
Note:
5. Select OK, and then select Done.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
295
Optimizing Power Settings
Power Preferences enable you to adjust settings to maximize your device’s battery
performance.
1. Go to Applications
and select Prefs
.
2. Select Power.
3. Set any of the following preferences:
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
Brightness sets the intensity of the screen and
keyboard backlights. Drag the slider or press
Left and Right to adjust the brightness
level.
Auto-off after indicates how long your screen
stays on during a period of inactivity. When
there is no interaction with the keyboard or
screen for the specified time period, your
screen turns off automatically.
On a call, dim backlight after indicates how long the backlight stays on at
normal intensity during a phone call. After the specified time period, the
backlight dims to conserve power during a long phone call.
Beam Receive indicates whether your Treo device is ready to receive
information over an infrared beam. If you leave this option off, you must
return to this screen to turn on this option the next time you want to
receive beamed information.
4. Select Done.
296
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
Locking Your Device and Information
Locking Your Keyboard (Keyguard)
The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so buttons aren’t accidentally pressed or
items on the screen aren’t activated while your device is in a pocket or bag.
By default, Keyguard turns on whenever the screen is off. Each time you wake up
the screen, you must turn off Keyguard to unlock the keyboard and use your
device.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
297
Customizing
Your Treo device includes several features that help protect your device
from inadvertent use and keep your information private. You can lock any of the
following features on your device:
䢇 Keyboard (Keyguard): You can use the Keyguard feature to disable the keyboard
and all buttons in case they are accidentally pressed in your bag or pocket.
䢇 Screen: You can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during an active
call or call alert.
䢇 Phone (Phone Lock): You can use the Phone Lock features to set your phone to
require a password before a call is made. The built-in security software lets
you call emergency services even if your phone is locked.
䢇 Device: You can set your device to require a password for you to see any
information on the device.
䢇 Entries: You can mask or hide entries marked as private and set your device to
require a password for viewing them.
To turn off Keyguard, do the following:
1. If the screen is off, press Power/End
to wake
up the screen.
2. Press Center
䊳
to turn off Keyguard.
To turn on Keyguard, press Option
press Power/End
.
and then
You can change how quickly Keyguard turns on, or you
can disable the feature altogether. To change the
Keyguard settings, do the following:
1. Go to Applications
and select Prefs
.
2. Select Keyguard.
3. Select the Auto-Keyguard pick list, and then do one of the following:
䡲
䡲
Select how quickly you want Keyguard to turn on: When power is turned
off, 5 seconds after power off, or 30 seconds after power off.
Select Disabled to completely disable the Keyguard feature until you turn
it on again.
4. Select Done.
Note:
298
If you disabled Keyguard, you can turn Keyguard on manually by pressing
Option + Power/End when the screen is on. If you use this method,
Keyguard stays on only until you press Center to turn it off; it does not
come back on. To permanently re-enable Keyguard, follow the preceding
procedure and select one of the options from the Auto-Keyguard list.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
Locking Your Screen
1. Go to Applications
and select Prefs
.
2. Select Keyguard.
3. Check one or both of the following boxes:
䡲
Incoming calls received: Disables the screen when the phone rings. You
䡲
must use the 5-way
to select the onscreen Answer and Ignore
buttons, or press Talk
to answer the call or Power/End
to
ignore the call.
On a call: Disables the screen after you answer a call. You must use the
5-way
to select the onscreen buttons during the call. Use this
setting to avoid accidentally pressing onscreen buttons while you’re
holding your device near your ear to speak.
4. Select Done.
Locking Your Phone (Phone Lock)
You can lock your phone to prevent unauthorized calls and use of other wireless
features. When your phone is locked, you must enter the correct code to unlock it.
You can still call emergency services when your phone is locked, however.
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Lock.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
299
Customizing
You can set your device to automatically lock the screen’s touch-sensitive features
in certain situations.
4. (Optional) Select Advanced, enter up to three numbers that you can dial
when your phone is locked, and then select OK. You do not need to enter
911 as one of the three numbers, because this number is always available.
5. Select one of the following Phone Lock options:
䡲
䡲
On phone power off locks your phone each time you turn it off. When this
setting is active, you must enter your lock code each time you turn your
phone on again.
Immediately locks your phone when you select OK. The next time you
dial a number, you must enter your lock code to unlock your phone.
After that, you can continue to make calls without entering your lock
code, unless you select one of the phone lock options.
6. When prompted, enter the lock code, and then select OK. (Unless you
changed your lock code, it is the last four digits of your phone number.)
7. If you want to change the lock code, select Change Lock Code, enter a new
lock code, and then select OK. Repeat this step to verify the new lock code.
8. Select OK. If you selected Immediately in step 5, your phone locks right away.
If you selected On phone power off, your phone locks the next time you press
and hold Power/End
to turn off your phone.
To disable the current Phone Lock settings:
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus .
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Lock.
4. Uncheck the On phone power off box and enter your lock code to change this
setting.
5. Select OK twice.
300
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
Locking Your Device
Important:
If you lock your device, you must enter the exact password to unlock it. If
you forget the password, you need to perform a hard reset to resume
using your device (see “Hard Reset” on page 315). Performing a hard
reset deletes all the entries in your device. However, you can restore all
previously synchronized information the next time you synchronize your
device with your computer (see “Synchronizing Information—The
Basics” on page 33).
1. Go to Applications
and select Security
.
2. Select the Password box.
3. Assign a password and a password hint.
4. Select the Auto Lock Device box.
5. When prompted, enter your password, and then
select OK.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
301
Customizing
To protect your personal information, you can lock the device so that you need to
enter your password to access any of your information or use any features of your
device, including the phone. You can still call emergency services when your
device is locked.
6. Select one of the following options:
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
Never prevents your device from locking
automatically. You can still lock your system
manually by selecting Lock & Turn Off and
then selecting Off & Lock.
On power off locks your device when you
turn off the screen, or when it shuts off with
the Auto-off feature.
At a preset time locks your device at a specific
time of day.
After a preset delay locks your device after a period of inactivity.
7. Select OK.
8. Do one of the following:
䡲
Select Lock & Turn Off to lock your device immediately.
䡲
Press Applications
device.
to accept your settings and continue using your
Working With Private Entries
In most applications, you can mark individual entries as private. All private entries
remain visible and accessible until you select the Security setting. You have two
Security setting options:
䢇 Hide Records prevents private entries from appearing anywhere in the
application.
䢇 Mask Records replaces private entries with a visual placeholder where the
entry would normally appear.
302
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
1. Display the entry that you want to mark private.
2. Select Details.
3. Check the Private box.
4. Select OK.
Hiding or Masking All Private Entries
1. Make sure the entries you want to hide or mask are marked private, as
described in the preceding procedure.
2. Go to Applications
and select Security
.
3. Select the Current Privacy pick list, and then select either Hide Records or
Mask Records.
4. If prompted for your password, enter it and select OK.
Viewing All Private Entries
You can reveal all of the entries you’ve hidden or masked.
1. Go to Applications
and select Security
.
2. Select the Current Privacy pick list, and then select Show Records.
3. If prompted for your password, enter it and then select OK.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
303
Customizing
After you enable the mask or hide settings, any entries marked as private are
immediately hidden or masked. If you define a password, you must enter it to
display private entries. If you do not define a password, you (or anyone else) can
reveal private entries without a password.
Viewing Private Entries in a Specific Application
1. Open the application that contains the private entries you want to see.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Security.
4. Select the Current Privacy pick list, and then select Show Records.
5. Select OK.
6. If prompted for your password, enter it and then select OK.
Security and Palm® Desktop Software (Windows)
The Windows version of Palm® Desktop software observes the security password
for your Treo device. If you forget your password, you cannot view your
information in Palm Desktop. If your device is unlocked, you can change your
password on your device, but all entries marked as private are deleted. You can
restore your private entries the next time you sync.
Follow these steps to recover a lost password:
1. Go to Applications
and select Security
.
2. Select the Password box.
3. Select the Lost Password box.
4. Select Yes.
304
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
Entering Owner Information
1. Go to Applications
and select Prefs
.
2. Select Owner.
3. If you assigned a password with the Security
application, select Unlock, enter your password,
and then select OK.
4. Enter the text that you want to appear on the
Owner Preferences screen.
5. Select Done.
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
305
Customizing
You can use Owner Preferences to record information that you want to associate
with your Treo device, such as your name, company name, and home phone
number. If you lock your device (see “Locking Your Device” on page 301), the
Owner Preferences information appears on the screen that requests your
password to unlock it, and you must also enter your password to change the
Owner Preferences information.
Using Connection Settings
Connecting to a Virtual Private Network
If you want to use your Treo device to access your corporate email account or
other files on your corporate server, you may need to set up a virtual private
network (VPN) on your device. A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate
server through the company’s firewall (security layer). You need a VPN on your
device if your device and your company’s server are located on opposite sides of
the firewall.
Check with your company’s system administrator to see if a VPN is required for
accessing the corporate server. If a VPN is necessary, you must purchase and
install a third-party VPN client on your device to use this feature.
Note:
For information about third-party VPN client software, see the Palm
Software Installation CD or visit www.palm.com/mytreo700pSprint.
1. Install your third-party VPN client. See “Installing Applications” on page 255
for details.
2. Go to Applications
and select Prefs
.
3. Select VPN.
4. Enter the settings provided by your corporate system administrator.
306
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
Purchasing Accessories for Your Device
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
307
Customizing
These and other accessories are available from your local Sprint Store or at
www.palm.com. For more information, you can also call the Sprint PCS® Accessory
Hotline at 800-974-2221 or visit www.sprint.com. Next day delivery is available in
select areas.
䢇 Vehicle Power Charger
Charges your device in your vehicle using the car lighter socket.
䢇 Replacement Battery
Serves as a backup battery if your primary battery becomes drained, is
charging, or has reached the end of its useful life.
䢇 USB Sync Cable
Provides an extra cable (your device comes with one USB sync cable).
䢇 USB Docking Cradle
Provides a convenient and elegant desktop solution for synchronizing
information, charging your device with any USB-enabled PC or Mac computer,
and charging a second battery.
䢇 Extra AC Charger
Provides an extra 100 - 240 volt AC charger for your device.
䢇 International Travel Adapters
Provides snap-on adapters for continental Europe, the United Kingdom, and
Australia. For use with the Extra AC Charger only.
䢇 Leather Side Case With Belt Clip
Clips to your belt or bag for quick access and protection for your device.
䢇 Stylus
Provides a replacement or spare stylus for your device.
308
Section 6B: Customizing Your Device
Section 7
Resources
310
S e c ti o n 7 A
Help
⽧
Trouble Upgrading?
⽧
Resetting Your Treo 700P Smart Device
⽧
Replacing the Battery
⽧
Troubleshooting
⽧
Making Room on Your Treo 700P Smart Device
⽧
Third-Party Applications
⽧
Errors
⽧
Where to Learn More
Section 7A: Help
Help
In This Section
311
Trouble Upgrading?
If you experience problems with your Treo™ 700P smart device after performing
the upgrade steps described in “Upgrading From Another Palm OS® Device” on
page 27, you may have incompatible applications or settings that were not
quarantined during the installation process. These files reside in the Backup
subfolder of your user folder. Incompatible applications or settings can lead to
numerous issues, including system resets and freezes. If you experience problems
after upgrading, follow these steps to correct the problem:
1. Locate your user folder on your computer:
䡲
䡲
Windows: If your device name is one word, your user folder name is the
first six characters of your device name. If your device name is two
words, your user folder name consists of the first six characters of the
second word of your device name, followed by the first letter of the first
word. For example, if your device name is John Smith, your user folder is
named SmithJ. Your user folder is usually located inside one of the
following folders:
C:\Program Files\Palm\
C:\Program Files\palmOne\
C:\Program Files\Handspring\
Mac: Your user folder name is the same as your device name and is
usually found in this location:
<Mac hard drive> : Users : <Your Mac username> : Documents: Palm :
Users.
2. Make a copy of your user folder and store it in a safe place.
䡲
312
Windows: Copy the folder, and then paste it to your Windows desktop.
Section 7A: Help
䡲
Mac: Select the folder, press and hold the Option key, and then drag the
folder to your Mac desktop.
3. Confirm that the copy of your user folder includes a subfolder named
Backup, and that all the files in the original Backup subfolder are also in the
copy of the Backup subfolder.
4. Delete all files from the original Backup subfolder.
Device” on page 314 for instructions.
6. Sync your Treo 700P smart device with your new desktop software; be sure
to select your existing device name from the User list.
7. Reinstall third-party applications from the copy of your Backup subfolder
(see “Installing Applications” on page 255 for instructions). We recommend
that you install one application at a time to help you identify the
application that caused the problem. We also recommend that you do not
install any applications that do any of the following:
䡲 Modify phone functions, such as ringtones, dialing, or caller ID.
䡲 Replace organizer applications, such as Contacts or Calendar.
䡲 Set data connection features, such as activating or ending data
connections.
䡲 Provide Web-clipping applications or files, such as PQA files.
䡲 Provide instant messaging features.
If you want to continue using these types of applications, please contact the
third-party developer for software updates and information about compatibility
with your Treo 700P smart device.
Section 7A: Help
313
Help
5. Perform a hard reset on your device. See “Resetting Your Treo 700P Smart
Resetting Your Treo 700P Smart Device
Soft Reset
Performing a soft reset is similar to restarting a computer. If your Treo 700P smart
device is not responding or you’re having trouble synchronizing with your
computer, a soft reset may help. All your information is retained when you
perform a soft reset.
1. Press the Battery Door Release button and slide the battery door downward
to remove it from your Treo 700P smart device.
2. Use the tip of the stylus to gently press the reset button on the back of your
Treo 700P smart device.
314
Section 7A: Help
System Reset
A system reset, also called a safe or warm reset, can be useful if your device loops
or freezes during a soft reset. Performing a system reset allows you to get out of
the loop and restores limited functionality to your device in order to uninstall a
third-party application that’s causing the problem. Note that after a system reset,
you must perform a soft reset to restore full functionality, including the wireless
features, to your device.
to remove it from your Treo 700P smart device.
2. While pressing and holding Up
on the 5-way navigator
, use the tip of
the stylus to gently press the reset button on the back of your device.
3. When the logo screen appears, release Up
.
4. Delete the third-party application that you suspect is causing the problem.
5. Perform a soft reset.
Hard Reset
A hard reset erases all information and third-party software on your Treo 700P
smart device. Never perform a hard reset without first trying a soft and a system reset.
You can restore previously synchronized information the next time you
synchronize.
Note:
Section 7A: Help
Your device might not re-establish a Sprint PCS Vision® session after a
hard reset. To manually establish a new Sprint PCS Vision session, open
the Web browser to access a Web site.
315
Help
1. Press the Battery Door Release button and slide the battery door downward
A hard reset can tell you if a problem stems from your Treo 700P smart device or
from an application installed on it. If you do not experience the problem after you
perform a hard reset, the problem is related to software you installed. See “ThirdParty Applications” on page 347 for suggestions on diagnosing third-party
software issues.
Note:
Some third-party applications do not create a backup on your computer
when you synchronize. If you perform a hard reset, you may lose data in
these applications and you will need to reinstall these applications after
the hard reset. Please contact the developer to find out which
information is backed up during synchronization.
1. Press the Battery Door Release button and slide the battery door downward
to remove it from your Treo 700P smart device.
2. While pressing and holding Power/End
, use the tip of the stylus to
gently press the reset button on the back of your Treo 700P smart device.
3. Continue pressing and holding Power/End
appears, release Power/End
. When the logo screen
.
4. When the “Erase all data?” prompt appears, press Up
to confirm the
hard reset.
Note:
316
If you do not see the “Erase all data?” message, the hard reset was not
performed. Please retry the above steps, making sure to hold Power/
End until the logo screen appears.
Section 7A: Help
Replacing the Battery
Your Treo 700P smart device comes with a replaceable battery. Be sure to use a
battery that is approved by Sprint and that is compatible with your device. Failure
to use the proper battery may result in a risk of personal injury or product
damage, and it will void your device warranty.
to turn off the screen.
2. Press the Battery Door Release button and slide the battery door downward
to remove it from your Treo 700P smart device.
3. Place a finger in the notch next to the battery and lift the battery up at a
45-degree angle to remove it from the compartment.
Battery Door
Release
Battery
Contacts
Device
Contacts
Notch
4. Align the metal contacts on the new battery with the contacts inside the
battery compartment.
Section 7A: Help
317
Help
1. Press Power/End
5. Insert the battery into the compartment at a 45-degree angle, pressing it
into place. Slide the battery door onto the back of the device until it clicks
into place.
6. Connect your device to the charger or sync cable.
7. Wait for your Treo 700P smart device to turn on, and then enable the
network time or set the date and time when prompted.
318
Section 7A: Help
Troubleshooting
Desktop Software Installation
If you are having trouble installing the desktop software, you may have the
wrong version of the software or some of your computer’s resources may be
unavailable. Follow these steps to retry the installation:
The Palm Software Installation CD installs software that enables you to
synchronize using Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for Windows.
If you want to synchronize using a different personal information manager
(PIM), you must install a third-party solution. Contact the PIM’s author or
vendor to learn whether desktop software is available for your new Treo device.
1. Make sure your computer profile includes administrator rights to install
software. In large organizations, these are usually granted by the system
administrator.
2. Restart your computer.
3. Quit any active applications, including virus scanners and Internet security
applications.
4. Make sure you’re installing the software from the Palm Software
Installation CD that came with your new Treo 700P smart device. (Other
versions of the desktop software may not work with this device.)
5. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD to restart the installation.
Section 7A: Help
319
Help
Note:
Important:
Always use the same language for your Treo device, your operating system, and
your desktop software. Otherwise, you may lose information or have difficulty
with synchronization. Support is not provided for mismatched language
setups.
Screen
The Screen Appears Blank
1. When a call lasts longer than the limit specified in Power Preferences, the
screen dims automatically. In certain lighting conditions, the screen may
appear blank when this occurs. Press any key except Power/End
to
restore the screen to normal brightness. (Pressing Power/End
hangs
up the call.)
2. When a period of inactivity lasts longer than the limit specified in Power
Preferences, the screen turns off. Press and release Power/End
up the screen.
to wake
3. Look closely at the screen. If you can see a dim image, try adjusting the
screen brightness (see “Adjusting the Brightness” on page 286).
4. If the screen is still blank, perform a soft reset (see “Soft Reset” on
page 314).
5. If the problem persists, connect the Treo 700P smart device to the AC
charger (see “Charging the Battery” on page 13) and perform a soft reset
again.
6. If that doesn’t work, perform a hard reset (see “Hard Reset” on page 315).
320
Section 7A: Help
The Screen Doesn’t Respond Accurately to Taps or It Activates Wrong Features
1. Go to Applications
2. Use the 5-way
and use the 5-way
to select Prefs
.
to select Touchscreen.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to align the screen.
4. Select Done.
the edge of the device.
6. If you’re using a screen protector, make sure that it is properly installed.
There’s a Blinking Bell at the Upper-Left Corner of the Screen
The blinking bell
in the upper-left corner of the screen is the Alert Manager
symbol. It appears when you have alarms or messages that you haven't
acknowledged.
1. Press and hold Center
or tap the Alert Manager symbol
with your
stylus.
2. When the list of pending alerts appears, do either of the following:
䡲
䡲
Select the alert text to view the item and keep it in the list.
Check the box next to an alert to clear it from the list, and then
select Done.
Synchronization
Synchronization backs up the information from your device onto your computer
and vice versa. If you ever need to perform a hard reset or otherwise need to erase
Section 7A: Help
321
Help
5. If the problem persists, check for material trapped between the screen and
all your information on your device, you can synchronize your device with your
computer to restore the information. Similarly, if your computer crashes and your
Palm® Desktop software information is damaged, you can recover your
information by synchronizing with your device. To make sure you always have an
up-to-date backup of your information, synchronize frequently.
This section describes synchronization between your Treo device and a desktop
computer running Palm Desktop software. You can also synchronize the
information on your device using third-party applications. See the separate
documentation for other applications for information on features and
configuration.
Before you attempt to synchronize, make sure you’ve installed the desktop
synchronization software from the Palm Software Installation CD.
I Can’t Find My User Folder
Windows: If your device name is one word, your user folder name is the first six
characters of your device name. If your device name is two words, your user folder
name consists of the first six characters of the second word of your device name
followed by the first letter of the first word. For example, if your device name is
John Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ. Your user folder is usually located
inside one of the following folders:
C:\Program Files\Palm\
C:\Program Files\palmOne\
C:\Program Files\Handspring\
Mac: Your user folder name is the same as your device name and is usually found
in this location: <Mac hard drive> : Users : <Your Mac username> : Documents :
Palm : Users.
322
Section 7A: Help
Palm Desktop Software Does Not Respond to a Synchronization Attempt
1. Make sure that the USB sync cable is securely connected to the USB port on
your computer and on the bottom of your device (see “Connecting Your Treo
Device to Your Computer” on page 32).
2. Make sure that HotSync manager is running:
䡲
checked. If you don’t see the HotSync manager icon
, click Start, select
Programs, select Palm, and then select HotSync Manager.
䡲
Mac: Find the Palm folder on your Mac hard drive. Double-click the
HotSync manager icon
in the Palm folder. In the Connection Settings
panel, set Local Setup Port to Palm USB.
3. Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
4. Perform a soft reset (see “Soft Reset” on page 314).
5. Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
6. If problems persist and you’re synchronizing through a USB hub, try
connecting the sync cable to a different USB port, or directly to your
computer’s built-in USB port.
Section 7A: Help
323
Help
Windows: Right-click the HotSync manager icon
in the taskbar in the
lower-right corner of your computer screen and make sure Local USB is
7. Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
8. (Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop software. Click Start, select Settings,
select Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs, select Palm Desktop
software, and then click Change/Remove.
Note:
Palm Desktop software for Mac computers does not provide an
automated uninstall option. For information on uninstalling
Palm Desktop software on a Mac, go to www.palm.com/us/support or
contact Palm Technical Support for Mac computers.
9. Reboot your computer.
10. Reinstall the synchronization software from the Palm Software Installation
CD that came with your device.
Synchronization Starts But Stops Without Finishing
If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS® device or received a system error, such
as Sys0505, there may be conflicts with software on your device.
1. Locate your Backup folder and rename the folder (for example, BackupOld).
Note that “Palm” in the following locations might be “Handspring” or
“palmOne,” based on the device you’re upgrading from:
䡲 Windows: C:\Program Files\Palm\<device name>
䡲 Mac: Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\<device name>
2. Synchronize.
3. Manually reinstall any third-party applications you want on your device.
If necessary, use the items in the old Backup folder you renamed.
324
Section 7A: Help
4. (Windows only) If the Windows New Hardware Wizard appears, the
synchronization process may be timing out before the wizard completes its
job. Follow all instructions in the New Hardware Wizard, and then sync again.
5. (Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop software. Click Start, select Settings,
select Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs, select Palm Desktop
software, and then click Change/Remove.
Help
Note:
Palm Desktop software for Mac computers does not provide an
automated uninstall option. For information on uninstalling
Palm Desktop software on a Mac, go to www.palm.com/us/support or
contact Palm Technical Support for Mac computers.
6. Reboot your computer.
7. Reinstall the synchronization software from the Palm Software Installation
CD that came with your device.
Tip:
The HotSync Log can tell you when and why synchronization stopped.
Right-click the HotSync manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right
corner of your computer screen, and then select View Log.
Synchronization Finishes But Information Does Not Appear Where It Should
1. Make sure you’re synchronizing with the intended desktop personal
information manager (PIM). The Palm Software Installation CD enables you
to choose whether you want to synchronize with Palm Desktop software or
Microsoft Outlook for Windows. Reinsert the installation CD and select
“Change your synchronization method” if necessary. If you use a different
PIM, you need to install third-party software to synchronize. For more
information, consult the company that makes the PIM.
Section 7A: Help
325
2. If multiple Palm OS devices are synchronizing with your computer, make
sure you are synchronizing with the correct device name. If information is
not appearing in Palm Desktop, make sure the correct device name is
selected in the User list on the toolbar of Palm Desktop.
3. Open HotSync manager on your computer, and make sure the necessary
conduits are set to Synchronize the files.
4. (Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop software. Click Start, select Settings,
select Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs, select Palm Desktop
software, and then click Change/Remove.
Note:
Palm Desktop software for Mac computers does not provide an
automated uninstall option. For information on uninstalling
Palm Desktop software on a Mac, go to www.palm.com/us/support or
contact Palm Technical Support for Mac computers.
5. Reboot your computer.
6. Reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD
that came with your device.
7. If you’re using Microsoft Outlook, consider the following:
䡲
䡲
326
With the included software, you can synchronize your Treo 700P smart
device with the Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Notes folders on your
computer. If you want to synchronize your information with a global
Exchange Address Book, you must copy the addresses to your local
Contacts list in Outlook (right-click the addresses, and then select Add to
Personal Address Book).
Outlook subfolders and public folders are not accessible with the
included software. You may want to use a third-party solution instead.
Section 7A: Help
䡲
If you’re trying to synchronize offline, be sure to set your Outlook
Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to be available offline.
Tip:
For more information on Outlook conduits, click the HotSync manager
icon in the taskbar, select Custom, select an application with Outlook in
its name, and then select Help.
Help
I Have Duplicate Entries in Microsoft Outlook After I Synchronize
1. Open Microsoft Outlook and delete the duplicate entries.
2. On your computer, go to the application with duplicate entries and
manually enter any information you’ve added to your device since the last
time you synchronized.
3. Click the HotSync manager icon
in the taskbar, and select Custom.
4. Select an application that has duplicate entries that also has Outlook in its
name.
5. Click Change.
6. Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK.
7. If more than one application has duplicate entries, then repeat steps 4
through 6 for each application with duplicates.
8. Click Done.
9. Synchronize your device and your computer.
Section 7A: Help
327
My Appointments Show Up in the Wrong Time Slot After I Sync
If you create an appointment in the wrong time zone (for example, your desktop
was set to the wrong time zone), it shows up in the wrong time zone on your
device after you sync. To be safe, enable local network time (see “Setting the Date
and Time” on page 294) and avoid assigning time zones to your appointments
(see “Creating an Event” on page 226).
If you’re using Microsoft Outlook:
1. Make sure that you installed the Microsoft Outlook conduit that came
with your Treo 700P smart device. If you're not sure whether this software is
installed, reinstall it.
2. Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the wrong entries.
3. On your computer, manually enter any Calendar information you added to
your device since the last time you synchronized.
4. Click the HotSync manager icon
in the taskbar, and select Custom.
5. Select an application that has both Calendar and Outlook in its name.
6. Click Change.
7. Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK.
8. Synchronize your device and your computer.
9. Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the Calendar Change HotSync Action
dialog box.
10. Select Synchronize the files, and then click OK.
328
Section 7A: Help
If you’re using Palm Desktop software:
1. On your device, press Calendar
2. Open the menus
.
.
3. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
4. Uncheck the New events use time zones box (if it's checked).
Help
5. On your computer, open Palm Desktop software and correct the wrong
entries.
6. On your computer, manually enter any Calendar information you added to
your device since the last time you synchronized.
7. Click the HotSync manager icon
in the taskbar, and select Custom.
8. Select an application that has both Calendar and Outlook in its name.
9. Click Change.
10. Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK.
11. Synchronize your device and your computer.
12. Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog
box.
13. Select Synchronize the files, and then click OK.
To avoid this problem in the future, do not assign time zones to your events.
Palm Desktop software does not support time zones.
Section 7A: Help
329
Phone
Signal Strength Is Weak
Become familiar with low coverage areas where you live, commute, work, and
play. Then you will know when to expect signal strength issues.
䢇 If you’re standing, move about 10 feet in any direction.
䢇 In a building, move near a window. Open any metal blinds.
䢇 In a building, move outdoors or to a more open area.
䢇 Outdoors, move away from large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.
䢇 In a vehicle, move your Treo device so that it’s level with a window.
My Treo Device Won’t Connect to the Mobile Network
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
Try the suggestions in the preceding section for weak signals.
Turn off your phone and turn it on again (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On
and Off” on page 55).
Perform a soft reset (see “Soft Reset” on page 314).
If you have an active DUN session (that is, you are using your device’s phone
as a modem), terminate the session (see “Using Your Device’s Phone as a
Modem” on page 118 or “Using Your Device as a Wireless Modem” on
page 173).
The Other Person Hears an Echo
䢇
330
Try decreasing the volume on your Treo device to avoid coupling or feedback
on the other person’s end. This applies to both the speakerphone and the
earpiece.
Section 7A: Help
䢇
䢇
Position the earpiece closer to your ear to prevent sound leaking back into the
microphone. Keep your hand away from the microphone hole, which is on the
bottom right side of the phone.
If you’re using the speakerphone feature with your device lying on a flat
surface, try turning the device face down (screen facing the surface).
I Hear My Own Voice Echo
My Voice Is Too Quiet on the Other End
䢇
䢇
Be sure to position the bottom of the Treo device, or the hands-free
microphone, close to your mouth.
Check the signal-strength indicator. If the signal is weak, try to find an area
with better coverage.
I Hear Static or Interference
Check the signal-strength indicator. If the signal is weak, try to find an area with
better coverage.
If you’re using a hands-free device enabled with Bluetooth® wireless technology,
try the following:
䢇 Move your Treo device closer to the hands-free device. Audio quality degrades
as the distance between your Treo device and hands-free device increases.
The effective range for a hands-free device varies among manufacturers.
䢇 Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between the Treo
device and your hands-free device. For example, move your Treo device to the
same side of your body as your hands-free device.
Section 7A: Help
331
Help
Ask the person on the other end of the call to turn down the volume on his or her
phone or to hold the phone closer to his or her ear.
My Device Hangs Up When I Hold It to My Ear
You may be accidentally pressing the onscreen Hang Up All button with your
cheek. Try holding the device so that your face doesn’t press against the screen. If
this is not convenient, you may want to disable the screen’s touch-sensitive
feature during active calls (see “Locking Your Screen” on page 299).
My Device Seems to Turn Off by Itself
If a system error and reset occur, the Treo device automatically turns the phone
on if it was on before the reset. However, if the device can’t determine if your
phone was on before the reset, the phone does not automatically turn on (see
“Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off” on page 55). If the problem persists
and you’re using third-party applications, see “Third-Party Applications” on
page 347 for additional suggestions.
My Device Makes or Answers Calls When It’s in a Bag or Pocket
Items in your bag or pocket may be pressing the onscreen Answer button or
otherwise activating screen items. If this happens, be sure to press
Power/End
to turn off the screen before placing it in your briefcase or
pocket. You may also want to disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during
incoming calls (see “Locking Your Screen” on page 299).
If you are using a Bluetooth hands-free device with your Treo device, you may
have turned the auto-answer feature on in Handsfree Preferences. For information,
see “Setting Up Your Hands-Free Device to Automatically Answer Calls” on
page 87.
332
Section 7A: Help
Hands-Free Devices
I Can’t Make or Receive Calls Using a Bluetooth Hands-Free Device
Confirm all of the following:
䢇 The device with Bluetooth® wireless technology is compatible with your Treo
device. Go to http://www.palm.com/us/support/bluetooth/treo700p_
bluetooth_compatibility.html for a list of compatible devices.
䢇
䢇
䢇
Go to Applications
and select Bluetooth
. Make sure the Bluetooth
setting is turned on in the Bluetooth application.
You have already formed a partnership between your Treo device and your
hands-free device, and the hands-free device appears in the Trusted Devices
list (see “Connecting to a Bluetooth Hands-Free Device” on page 84).
Your hands-free device is charged and turned on.
Your Treo device is within range of the hands-free device.
Note:
Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in optimum environmental conditions.
Performance and range can be affected by physical obstacles, radio
interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.
I Hear Static or Interference When Using My Hands-Free Device
䢇
䢇
Try moving your Treo device closer to the hands-free device. Audio quality
degrades as the distance between your Treo device and hands-free device
increases. The effective range for a hands-free device varies among
manufacturers.
Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between the Treo
device and your hands-free device.
Section 7A: Help
333
Help
䢇
Some Features of My Hands-Free Device Don’t Work With My Treo Device
䢇
䢇
Check the Palm compatibility list at http://www.palm.com/us/support/
bluetooth/treo700p_bluetooth_compatibility.html to ensure that your device is
compatible.
Not all hands-free features work with every hands-free device. Check the
documentation that came with your hands-free device or the manufacturer’s
Web site for feature-compatibility information specific to your device.
Email
Note:
The following troubleshooting tips apply to the VersaMail® application
only. If you are using Sprint PCS Business ConnectionSM Personal Edition
or GoodLink™ as your email application, refer to the documentation
included with those applications for troubleshooting tips.
I Have Problems Using My Account
Occasionally you may experience problems using an email account after you set
it up. If you followed the account setup procedure and are experiencing problems
using the account, verify that the account complies with your email provider’s
requirements by following these steps:
䢇 Verify both your password and your username for your email account.
䢇 Some wireless service providers require you to be on their network to use
your email account. If this is the case, be sure to use your provider's network
as the connection type for the account.
䢇 Some email service providers have other requirements specific to their
service. For example, Yahoo! requires you to pay for a POP account in order to
334
Section 7A: Help
䢇
download email messages from your Yahoo! account to your device. Check
with your service provider to see if any provider-specific requirements exist.
Service provider settings change frequently. If your email account was
working but you are currently experiencing problems, check with your
wireless or email service provider to see if any of the account settings have
changed.
Short periods of time when email is unavailable are common due to server
problems or poor wireless coverage. If you have problems sending or receiving
mail for an extended period of time, check with your ISP or email service provider
to verify that the service is working properly, and check with Sprint Customer
Service for outage information in your area.
Auto Sync Is Not Working
If an Auto Sync operation is occurring and you turn your device’s phone off or the
connection to your email service provider is disconnected, the Auto Sync
operation fails. If a scheduled Auto Sync doesn’t take place or starts but does not
finish, make sure your device’s phone is on and that your data connection to your
email service provider has not been interrupted.
I Have Problems Sending Email
If you are able to receive email messages but cannot send them, try these steps,
in turn:
䢇 Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to access email on a wireless
device. Several providers, like Hotmail, do not offer this option at all; other
providers require an upgrade to access email on a wireless device.
Section 7A: Help
335
Help
I Have Problems Sending and Receiving Email
䢇
䢇
Turn on ESMTP. Many services require authenticated access, or ESMTP, to use
their SMTP servers. See the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the
Palm Software Installation CD for information on turning ESMTP on.
Enter the name of a different outgoing mail server for sending mail. Many
ISPs, such as cable companies, require that you have an Internet connection to
their network to send email through their servers. In this case, you can almost
always receive email from these accounts, but if you want to send email, you
must send it through another server. Check with your email service provider
for the correct outgoing mail server name.
I Have Problems Synchronizing Messages on My Device With Messages on
My Computer
Make sure you have chosen the same settings for the account on both your device
and your computer. For example, if the account is set up on your device to use the
POP protocol, check HotSync manager on your computer to make sure that POP is
selected as the protocol for that account.
My vCard or vCal Email Attachment Isn’t Forwarding Correctly
Palm Desktop software provides several features that work with email client
software on a Windows computer. For these features to work correctly, the email
client software must be properly set up. Follow these steps to check the settings:
1. Click Start on your computer, and then select Settings.
2. Select Control Panel.
3. Select Internet Options, and then click the Programs tab.
4. Make sure that the email field is set to the correct email client software.
336
Section 7A: Help
5. Click OK.
6. Start the email client software and make sure it is configured as the default
MAPI client. (Consult the documentation for your desktop email application
for more information.)
After I Get Messages, Either Manually or Through Auto Sync, Messages
Disappear From My Inbox
You can change the setting in VersaMail® preferences to download fewer than
three days’ worth of messages (in which case, more-recent messages are deleted
from your Inbox), or to download all messages regardless of the date (in which
case all messages continue to appear in your Inbox).
I Am Using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, But Email Messages, Calendar
Events, and Contacts Information Are Not Downloading to My Device
Check with your system administrator to obtain the name of the mail server that
offers you wireless access to the corporate mail system. If you cannot obtain the
name of this server (some companies do not give it out, because they do not want
wireless access to their servers), you cannot synchronize email messages,
Calendar events, and Contacts information with the server using Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync.
Section 7A: Help
337
Help
If you have an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®, when you
perform an Auto Sync, the last three days’ worth of email messages are
downloaded from your mail server to your Inbox. All messages older than three
days are deleted from your Inbox; they are not deleted on the server, however.
Messaging
I Can’t Tell If Data Services Are Available
When your phone is on, icons appear in the title bar in the Main view of the Phone
application to indicate whether data services are available and whether a data
connection is active. See “Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status” on
page 100 for a description of the icons that indicate that data services are
available.
If your phone is on and you do not see any of the data icons, then data services
are not available in your current location.
I Can’t Send or Receive SMS Text Messages
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
Make sure your phone is turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On and
Off” on page 55).
Contact Sprint to verify that your plan includes SMS messaging services, that
these services have been correctly activated, and that they are available at
your location. Sprint should be able to tell you if messaging services have
been experiencing transmission delays. Delays can also occur between the
time that a message is sent and the time it is received.
Verify with the recipient that the receiving device can handle text messages.
If a text message arrives but does not display an alert, perform a soft reset
(see “Soft Reset” on page 314).
I Can’t Send or Receive Sprint PCS® Picture Mail Messages
䢇
338
Make sure your phone is turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On and
Off” on page 55).
Section 7A: Help
䢇
Contact Sprint to verify that your plan includes Sprint PCS Picture Mail
messaging services, that these services have been correctly activated, and
that they are available at your location. Sprint should be able to tell you if
messaging services have been experiencing transmission delays. Delays can
also occur between the time that a message is sent and the time it is received.
䢇
Make sure that the Sprint PCS Vision icon
䢇
䢇
SM
or
appears in the title bar of the Main view of the Phone application. If you
do not see one of these icons, data services are not available in your current
location and you cannot exchange Picture Mail messages.
Verify with the recipient that the receiving device can handle Picture Mail
messages.
If you have an active DUN session (that is, you are using your device’s phone
as a modem), terminate the session (see “Using Your Device’s Phone as a
Modem” on page 118 or “Using Your Device as a Wireless Modem” on
page 173).
If a Picture Mail message arrives but does not display an alert, perform a soft
reset (see “Soft Reset” on page 314).
Section 7A: Help
339
Help
䢇
or Sprint Power Vision icon
Web
I Can’t Tell If Data Services Are Available
When your phone is on, icons appear in the title bar in the Main view of the Phone
application to indicate whether data services are available and whether a data
connection is active. See “Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status” on
page 100 for a description of the icons that indicate that data services are
available.
If your phone is on and you do not see any of the data icons, then data services
are not available in your current location.
The Device Won’t Connect to the Internet
Your Treo 700P smart device supports Sprint PCS Vision and Sprint Power Vision,
two ways to connect to the Internet that are persistent and are faster and more
reliable than a regular dial-up connection. All Sprint customers can connect to
the Internet, but to avoid high per-minute charges, we recommend that you
subscribe to a Sprint PCS Vision plan. Contact Sprint to verify that your
subscription plan includes Sprint PCS Vision services and that these services have
been correctly activated, and to confirm your username and password. Sprint
should also be able to tell you if there are any outages in your area.
1. Press and hold Power/End
Power/End
2. Press Phone
to turn off your phone. Then press and hold
again to turn your phone back on.
and look for either the Sprint PCS Vision icon
Power Vision icon
340
or
or Sprint
in the title bar of the Main view.
Section 7A: Help
3. If you see one of these icons, you are in a data coverage area. Try connecting
to the Internet again. If you do not see one of these icons, go to Applications
, select Prefs
, and continue with the following steps.
4. Select Network.
5. Select the Service pick list and select PCS Vision. (If PCS Vision does not appear
in the list, call Sprint for assistance.)
7. If the connection is successful, go to the Web browser. If you still can’t make
a connection, perform a soft reset (see “Soft Reset” on page 314).
8. If your phone did not turn on automatically, press and hold Power/End
to turn on your phone, and try connecting to the Internet.
9. Contact Sprint to verify the following:
䡲
䡲
䡲
䡲
Your subscription plan includes high-speed data services.
Data services have been activated on your account.
Data coverage is available in your location.
There are no data service outages in your location.
I Can’t Access a Web Page
First, make sure you have Internet access: Open the Web browser to see if you can
view a Web page you’ve successfully viewed before. To ensure that you’re viewing
the page directly from the Internet, open the menus
Refresh.
, select Go, and then select
If you can view the page after you refresh it but you still can’t access the page you
were originally trying to view, the page may contain elements that are not
Section 7A: Help
341
Help
6. Select Connect.
supported by the Web browser. These include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript,
WMLScript, and other plug-ins.
Some Web sites use a redirector to their true home page. If the Web browser on
your device can’t follow the redirect, try using a desktop browser to see
the landing page of the redirector, and then enter that address in the Web
browser on your device.
It Takes a Long Time for a Web Page to Load
If it is taking longer than usual to load Web pages, you may have traveled from a
high-speed Sprint Power Vision service area to a Sprint PCS Vision service area.
Although Sprint PCS Vision data service is considered a high-speed data service, it
can seem slow if you are used to Sprint Power Vision speed.
1. Press Phone
Vision icon
and look for the Sprint PCS Vision icon
or
or Sprint Power
in the title bar of the Main view.
2. If you see the Sprint Power Vision icon
or , there may be a problem
with the Web site you are trying to access. Try opening a different Web page
to see if the problem persists.
3. If you see the Sprint PCS Vision icon
, you may be experiencing the
difference in performance between the two types of data networks.
4. To be sure there is not a problem with your connection to the Sprint
network, press and hold Power/End
to turn off your phone. Then press
and hold the same button to turn it back on again.
5. Try opening the Web page again to see if it loads faster.
342
Section 7A: Help
An Image or Map Is Displayed Too Small on the Device Screen
The Web browser has two modes: Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized mode
resizes all images and page elements to make them fit in a single vertical column
on the Treo device screen. Switch to Wide Page mode to see the image in its
original, full-size form (see “Viewing a Web Page” on page 160).
A Secure Site Refuses to Permit a Transaction
Some Web sites don’t support certain browsers for transactions. Please contact
the site’s Webmaster to make sure the site allows transactions using your
device’s Web browser.
Section 7A: Help
343
Help
You may also be able to save the image to your device or to an expansion card and
then view the image later on your computer (see “Downloading Files From a Web
Page” on page 163 for information).
Dial-Up Networking Using Bluetooth Technology
My Computer Does Not Appear on the Trusted Devices Screen
䢇
䢇
If you select Add Device and your computer does not appear on the list, make
sure that the computer’s Bluetooth setting is on and that the computer is
discoverable. Check with your computer manufacturer for help with locating
and changing these settings.
Select Find More on the Trusted Devices screen again.
I Get a Message That There Is an Error Creating a DUN Connection With My Treo
Device
䢇
Re-create the partnership between your Treo 700P smart device and your
computer (see “Accepting a Connection From Another Bluetooth Device” on
page 177).
Camera
Here are some tips for taking good pictures with the built-in camera:
䢇 Clean the camera’s lens with a soft, lint-free cloth.
䢇 Take pictures in brighter lighting conditions. Low-light images may be grainy,
due to the sensitivity of the camera.
䢇 Hold the device as still as possible. Try supporting your picture-taking arm up
against your body or a stationary object (such as a wall).
䢇 Keep the subject of the pictures still. Exposure time is longer with lower light
levels, so you may see a blur.
䢇 For best results, verify that you have the brightest light source coming from
behind you, lighting the subject’s face. Avoid taking indoor pictures with the
subject in front of a window or light.
344
Section 7A: Help
䢇
Make sure the subject is at least 18 inches away from the camera to ensure
good focus.
Remember that when you synchronize your device with your computer, your
photos and videos are stored on your hard drive (see “Viewing Pictures and
Videos on Your Computer” on page 202).
Help
Section 7A: Help
345
Making Room on Your Treo 700P Smart Device
Keep in mind that your Treo 700P smart device includes an expansion slot, and
that you can store applications and information on expansion cards (sold
separately). However, you still need free memory on the device itself to run
applications from an expansion card.
If you store a large number of entries or install many third-party applications, the
internal memory on your Treo 700P smart device may fill up. Here are some
common ways to clear space on your device:
䢇 Email. Messages that have large attachments can quickly consume memory
on your device. Delete emails with large attachments. If you have hundreds of
messages with or without attachments, you may want to delete older
messages to make room (see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on
the Palm Software Installation CD.)
䢇 Pics&Videos Pictures can consume excessive memory. Move your pictures to
an expansion card, synchronize them to your computer (see “Viewing Pictures
and Videos on Your Computer” on page 202), or upload them to your account
on the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Web site, and then delete large files from your
Treo 700P smart device (see “Deleting a Picture or Video” on page 199).
䢇 Music. Music files often consume excessive memory. Move music files to an
expansion card, or delete large files from your device.
䢇 Internet. If you have set a large Web browser cache, you may want to clear the
cache (see “Customizing Your Web Browser Settings” on page 170).
䢇 Third-party applications. You can delete infrequently used applications (see
“Removing Applications” on page 258) or move them to an expansion card
(see “Using Expansion Cards” on page 276).
346
Section 7A: Help
Third-Party Applications
Some third-party applications can cause conflicts with your Treo device. Thirdparty applications that modify the wireless features of your device may require
extra troubleshooting. If you recently installed an application and your Treo 700P
smart device seems to be stuck, try the following:
Help
1. Perform a soft reset (see “Soft Reset” on page 314).
2. If the problem persists, perform a system reset (see “System Reset” on
page 315).
3. Delete the most recently installed application from your Treo 700P smart
device (see “Removing Applications” on page 258).
4. If the problem persists, perform another system reset.
5. If possible, synchronize your device with your computer to back up your
most recent information.
6. If you’re unable to perform the steps above or the problem persists, locate
your Backup folder on your computer and rename the folder (for example,
BackupOld). Note that “Palm” in the following locations might be
“Handspring” or “palmOne,” based on the device you’re upgrading from:
䡲 Windows: C:\Program Files\Palm\device name.
䡲 Mac: Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\device name.
7. Perform a hard reset (see “Hard Reset” on page 315).
8. Synchronize to restore your Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, Memos, and
Pics&Videos information. You may need to manually restore information in
other applications.
Section 7A: Help
347
9. If the problem is resolved, begin reinstalling your third-party applications
one at a time by double-clicking a single file in the original Backup folder
that you renamed, and sync after each application you install.
10. If the problem recurs, delete the last application you installed and report
the problem to its developer.
Remember that not all third-party applications were written with the Treo 700P
smart device keyboard and 5-way navigator
in mind. You may encounter
strange behavior or errors in these applications if you use the keyboard and
5-way
.
Getting More Help
Contact the author or vendor of any third-party software if you require further
assistance. Sprint does not provide technical support for applications that are not
built into your Treo 700P smart device.
348
Section 7A: Help
Errors
Your Treo device is designed to minimize interruptions when a system error
occurs. If your device encounters a system error, it automatically resets itself and
resumes functioning as normal. If possible, it even turns the phone back on if it
was on before the error occurred.
1. Press Phone
.
2. Enter ##377, and then press Talk
.
3. Review the screen with details about the conditions that led up to the most
recent automatic reset.
4. Select OK.
Please note that third-party developers create their own error messages. If you do
not understand an error message, please contact the developer of the application
for help.
Fixing an Error 67 Message
1. Press Phone
.
2. From the Dial Pad, enter ##data.
3. Open the menus
.
4. Select Update Vision Profile from the Options menu.
5. Select Now.
Section 7A: Help
349
Help
Sometimes you might want to know more about an error. The Treo 700P smart
device uses a special interface to show error messages in greater detail.
Where to Learn More
For a Quick Introduction
䢇
Quick Tour: The Quick Tour introduces you to many of your Treo device’s
features. It is already installed on your device, and you can open it any time.
Go to Applications
, and then select Quick Tour
.
While Using Your Device
䢇
On-device User Guide: A copy of this guide is included right on your device. The
on-device guide is specially formatted for your device screen. To view the
on-device guide, go to Applications
䢇
䢇
.
Tips: Many of the built-in applications include helpful tips for getting the
most out of your device. To view these tips, open an application, open the
menus
䢇
, and then select My Treo
, select Options, and then select Tips.
Information: Many screens have a Tips icon
in the upper-right corner. Select
the Tips icon to learn about the tasks you can perform in that dialog box.
Online support from Palm: For up-to-date downloads, troubleshooting, and
support information, go to www.palm.com/us/support/treo700pSprint.
If You Need More Information
䢇
䢇
350
Books: Many books on Palm OS devices are available in local or online book
retailers (look in the computers section), or visit www.palm.com.
Online forums: Consult online Treo device user discussion groups to swap
information and learn about topics you may find nowhere else. Visit
www.palm.com for details.
Section 7A: Help
Visiting the Sprint Web Site
You can get up-to-date information on Sprint PCS® services and options by
signing onto the Sprint Web site at www.sprint.com.
Help
When you visit Sprint online, you can
䢇 Review coverage maps
䢇 Learn how to use voicemail
䢇 Access your account information
䢇 Purchase accessories
䢇 Add additional options to your service plan
䢇 Check out frequently asked questions
䢇 And more
Reaching Sprint Customer Service
You can reach Sprint Customer Service many different ways:
䢇
On your Treo 700P smart device, press Phone
; enter *2, and then press Talk
.
䢇
䢇
䢇
Sign on to your account at www.sprint.com.
Call toll-free at 1-888-211-4727 (Consumer customers),
–or–
1-888-788-4727 (Business customers).
Write to Sprint Customer Service, P.O. Box 8077, London, KY 40742.
Section 7A: Help
351
Receiving Automated Invoicing Information
For your convenience, your phone gives you access to invoicing information on
your Sprint PCS Account. This information includes balance due, payment
received, invoicing cycle, and the number of minutes used since your last
invoicing cycle. (Normal airtime usage will apply.)
䊳
Press Phone
Note:
, enter *4, and then press Talk
.
This service may not be available in all Affiliate areas.
Sprint 411
You have access to a variety of services and information through Sprint 411,
including residential, business, and government listings; assistance with local or
long-distance calls; movie listings; and hotel, restaurant, shopping, and major
local event information. There is a per-call charge and you will be billed for
airtime.
䊳
Press Phone
, enter 411, and then press Talk
.
Sprint PCS Operator Services
Sprint PCS Operator Services provides assistance when placing collect calls or
when placing calls billed to a local telephone calling card or third party.
䊳
Press Phone
, enter 0, and then press Talk
.
For more information or to see the latest in products and services, visit Sprint
online at www.sprint.com.
352
Section 7A: Help
S e c ti o n 7 B
Glossary
1xEV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized): A wireless broadband technology (also
known as EVDO) that is designed for very high-speed data transfer with average
download speeds of 400 to 700Kbps and that is capable of reaching speeds up to
a theoretical maximum of 2.4Mb/s, and upload speeds up to 156Kb/s. The Sprint
SM
Power Vision Network uses 1xEV-DO technology.
Alt (alternative)
Alt
: A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the keyboard, and then press
to access variations such as international characters and symbols.
Applications
: The screen on your Treo™ 700P smart device from which you can
open all applications.
Auto-off interval: The time of inactivity that passes before the screen on your
Treo 700P smart device turns off. The wireless features on your device are
unaffected by this setting.
Beam: To send or receive an entry or application using the infrared port on your
Treo 700P smart device.
Section 7B: Glossary
353
Glossary
1xRTT: A standard of Mobile Internet connectivity that allows for persistent data
connections as long as you are actively using your data connection. The average
data transmission rate is around 70Kb/s, although theoretical limits are
153.6Kb/s. With Sprint PCS Vision® plans, you pay a monthly rate for unlimited
data transfer and you don't pay for connection time.
Bluetooth® wireless technology: Technology that enables devices such as smart
devices, mobile phones, and computers to connect wirelessly to each other so
that they can exchange information over short distances.
Device name: The name associated with your Treo device that distinguishes it
from other Palm OS® devices. When you first synchronize your device, you are
asked to give it a device name. This name appears in the User list in
Palm® Desktop software.
Dial-up networking: Wireless technology that enables you to convert your device
into a wireless modem so that you can access the Internet from your computer.
Dialog box: A set of options and command buttons that is enclosed by a border
and that enables you to carry out a specific task.
Favorite: A button that provides quick access to a phone number (speed dial) or
commonly used application (Contacts, Web, Messaging, and so on). You can define
up to 70 favorite buttons in the Phone application.
GoodLink™ Applications software: An optional secure wireless messaging
application allowing real-time push synchronization with your Microsoft Outlook
server.
HotSync®: The technology that synchronizes your Treo 700P smart device and your
computer with the simple press of a button.
HotSync manager: The computer application that manages the synchronization
with your Treo 700P smart device.
Infrared (IR): A way of transmitting information using light waves. The IR port on
your Treo 700P smart device enables you to transfer information between other IR
devices within a short radius.
Lithium Ion (Li-Ion): The rechargeable battery technology used in Treo devices.
354
Section 7B: Glossary
On Demand: A Sprint Power Vision Network feature that allows you to personalize
your device’s data features.
Option key : The keyboard button that enables you to access the number,
symbol, or feature that appears above the letter on each key.
Palm® Desktop software: A PIM application for computers that helps you manage
your personal information and keep it synchronized with your Treo 700P smart
device.
Palm™ Quick Install: The component on your Windows computer that enables you
to install Palm OS applications and other information on your Treo 700P smart
device.
Partnership: Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your device and a hands-free
device—that can connect because each device finds the same passkey on the
other device. Once you form a partnership with a device, you don’t need to enter
a passkey to connect with that device. Partnership is also know as paired
relationship, pairing, trusted device, or trusted pair on some devices.
Phone
: The application on your Treo device that enables you to make and
receive phone calls.
Phone as Modem: Feature that enables your device (when connected to the Sprint
Power Vision network) to be used as a high-speed modem for your computer,
using a wired (USB sync cable) connection.
Section 7B: Glossary
355
Glossary
Palm OS®: The operating system of your Treo 700P smart device. Palm OS is known
for its simplicity of use and for the large number of compatible third-party
applications that can be added to your Treo 700P smart device.
PIM (personal information management): A genre of software that includes
applications such as Palm Desktop software, Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Notes, and
ACT!. PIMs generally store contacts, schedules, tasks, and memos.
SMS: The service that enables devices to exchange short text messages almost
instantly. Text messages are typically exchanged between mobile phones. These
messages can usually include up to 160 characters. Your device can send and
receive SMS messages while you are on a voice call.
Sprint PCS Business Connection : A service offered by Sprint that enables you to
access your existing corporate or personal email on your Treo™ 700P smart device.
For more information, visit www.sprint.com.
SM
Sprint PCS® Picture Mail: An enhanced Sprint PCS Vision messaging service that
enables you to instantly share pictures and videos with friends and family. You
can also manage your pictures and videos online.
Sprint PCS Vision®: The next generation of Mobile Internet access that enables
you to check your email, browse the Web, and share pictures and videos with
Sprint PCS Picture Mail.
SM
Sprint Power Vision Network: An advanced mobile data network using the fastest
commercially available wireless network technology (EVDO) to deliver
broadband-like transfer speeds for your data connections.
Sprint TVSM: A Sprint Power Vision Network service that allows you to view live
Mobile Digital TV (MDTV) on your Treo 700P smart device.
Streaming: Technology that enables you to access media content—for example,
to watch video or listen to an audio program—directly from the Internet on your
device without needing to download a file that you save on your device.
356
Section 7B: Glossary
User folder: The folder on your computer that contains both the information you
enter in Palm® Desktop software and the information you enter on your device
and synchronize with Palm Desktop software.
Glossary
Section 7B: Glossary
357
358
Section 7B: Glossary
Section 8
Safety and Specifications
360
S e c ti o n 8 A
Important Safety Information
In This Section
General Precautions
⽧
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Device
⽧
Using Your Phone With a Hearing Aid Device
⽧
Caring for the Battery
⽧
Radiofrequency (RF) Energy
⽧
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Device
⽧
Owner’s Record
⽧
User’s Guide Proprietary Notice
Safety
⽧
This guide contains important operational and safety information that will help you
safely use your Treo™ 700P smart device. Failure to read and follow the information
provided in this guide may result in serious bodily injury, death, or property
damage.
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
361
General Precautions
There are several simple guidelines to operating your device properly and
maintaining safe, satisfactory service.
䢇 Hold the device with the antenna over your shoulder.
䢇 Try not to hold, bend, or twist the device’s antenna.
䢇 Don’t use the device if the antenna is damaged.
䢇 Speak directly into the microphone.
䢇 Avoid exposing your device and accessories to rain or liquid spills. If your
device does get wet, immediately turn the power off and remove the battery.
䢇 Although your device is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and
can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it.
䢇 Any changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved in this
document could void your warranty for this equipment and void your
authority to operate this equipment.
Note:
362
For the best care of your device, only Sprint authorized personnel should service
your device and accessories. Failure to do so may be dangerous and void your
warranty.
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Device
Do Not Rely on Your Device’s Phone for Emergency Calls
Wireless phones such as the one on your Treo device operate using radio signals,
which cannot guarantee connection in all conditions. Therefore you should never
rely solely upon any wireless phone for essential communication (for example,
medical emergencies). Emergency calls may not be possible on all cellular
networks or when certain network services and/or phone features are in use.
Check with your local service provider for details.
Using Your Phone While Driving
Talking on your phone while driving (or operating the phone without a handsfree device) is prohibited in some jurisdictions. Laws vary as to specific
restrictions. Remember that safety always comes first.
Purchase an optional hands-free accessory at your local Sprint Store, or call the
Sprint PCS Accessory Hotline at 1-800-974-2221 or by entering #222 on your
Treo 700P smart device.
Safety
Tip:
Following Safety Guidelines
To operate your device safely and efficiently, always follow any special regulations
in a given area. Turn your device’s phone off in areas where use is forbidden or
when it may cause interference or danger.
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
363
Using Your Device’s Phone Near Other Electronic Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radiofrequency (RF) signals.
However, RF signals from wireless phones may affect inadequately shielded
electronic equipment.
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic
operating systems and/or entertainment systems in motor vehicles. Check with
the manufacturer or their representative to determine if these systems are
adequately shielded from external RF signals. Also check with the manufacturer
regarding any equipment that has been added to your vehicle.
Consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers
and hearing aids, to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF
signals.
Note:
Always turn off the phone in health care facilities and request permission
before using the phone near medical equipment.
Turning Off Your Phone Before Flying
Turn off your phone before boarding any aircraft. To prevent possible interference
with aircraft systems, the U.S. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations
require you to have permission from a crew member to use your phone while the
plane is on the ground. To prevent any risk of interference, FCC regulations
prohibit using your phone while the plane is in the air.
364
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
Turning Off Your Phone in Dangerous Areas
To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your phone off when in a
blasting area or in other areas with signs indicating two-way radios should be
turned off. Construction crews often use remote-control RF devices to set off
explosives.
Note:
Never transport or store flammable gas, flammable liquid, or explosives in the
compartment of your vehicle that contains your phone or accessories.
Restricting Children’s Access to Your Device
Your Treo device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it as they could
hurt themselves and others, damage the device and/or its phone, or make calls
that increase your Sprint PCS Invoice.
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
365
Safety
Turn your phone off when you’re in any area that has a potentially explosive
atmosphere. Although it’s rare, your phone and accessories could generate
sparks. Sparks can cause an explosion or fire, resulting in bodily injury or even
death. These areas are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include:
䢇 Fueling areas such as gas stations.
䢇 Below deck on boats.
䢇 Fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities.
䢇 Areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or
metal powders.
䢇 Any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle’s
engine.
Using Your Phone With a Hearing Aid Device
Your Treo™ 700P smart device is compliant with the FCC Hearing Aid
Compatibility (HAC) requirements. For additional HAC information, including the
HAC rating of this product, please refer to www.palm.com/treoHAC.
Your device has been tested for hearing aid device compatibility. When some
wireless phones are used near some hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear
implants), users may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some hearing
devices are more immune than others to this interference noise, and phones also
vary in the amount of interference they generate.
The wireless telephone industry has developed ratings for some of their mobile
phones, to assist hearing device users in finding phones that may be compatible
with their hearing devices. Not all phones have been rated. Phones that have
been rated will have an “M3” or “M4” rating on the box. Your Treo 700P smart
device phone has an M3 rating.
Note:
Phones rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and may generate less
interference to hearing devices than phones that are not labeled. M4 is the
better/higher of the two ratings.
The M3/M4 ratings do not guarantee successful interoperation between your
phone and hearing aid device. Results will vary depending on the level of
immunity of your hearing device and degree of your hearing loss.
The more immune your hearing aid device is, the less likely you are to experience
interference noise from your wireless phone. Hearing aid devices should have
ratings similar to phones. Ask your hearing healthcare professional for the rating
366
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
of your aids. Most new hearing aids have at least an M2 immunity level. Add the
“M” ratings of your hearing aid and your phone to determine probable usability:
䢇 Any combined rating equal to or greater than six offers best use.
䢇 Any combined rating equal to five is considered normal use.
䢇 Any combined rating equal to four is considered usable.
Thus, if you pair an M3 hearing aid with an M3 phone, you will have a combined
rating of six for “best use.”
Sprint further suggests you experiment with multiple phones (even those not
labeled M3 or M4) while in the store to find the one that works best with your
hearing aid device. Should you experience interference after purchasing your
phone, promptly return it to the store. With the Sprint 14-day Risk-Free
Guarantee you may return the phone within 14 days of purchase for a full refund.
Getting the Best Hearing Device Experience With Your Treo 700P Smart Device
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
367
Safety
To further minimize interference:
䢇 There is usually less interference on the microphone setting than the telecoil
setting.
䢇 Set the phone’s screen and keyboard backlight settings to ensure the
minimum time interval. See “Optimizing Power Settings” on page 296 for
instructions.
䢇 Position the phone so the antenna is farthest from your hearing aid.
䢇 Move the phone around to find the point with least interference.
Caring for the Battery
Protecting Your Battery
The guidelines listed below help you get the most out of your battery’s
performance.
䢇 Recently there have been some public reports of wireless phone batteries
overheating, catching fire, or exploding. It appears that many, if not all, of
these reports involve counterfeit or inexpensive, aftermarket-brand batteries
with unknown or questionable manufacturing standards. Sprint is not aware
of similar problems with Sprint PCS® Treo devices resulting from the proper
use of batteries and accessories approved by Sprint or the manufacturer of
your phone. Use only Sprint or manufacturer-approved batteries and
accessories found at Sprint Stores or through your device’s manufacturer, or
call 1-866-343-1114 to order. They’re also available at www.sprint.com — click
the Wireless link under Personal, and then click Accessories under Shop the PCS
Store Online. Buying the right batteries and accessories is the best way to
ensure they’re genuine and safe.
䢇 In order to avoid damage, charge the battery only in temperatures that range
from 32° F to 113° F (0° C to 45° C).
䢇 Don’t use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high humidity areas,
such as the bathroom.
䢇 Never dispose of the battery by incineration.
䢇 Keep the metal contacts on top of the battery clean.
䢇 Don’t attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery.
䢇 The battery may need recharging if it has not been used for a long period of
time.
368
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
䢇
䢇
It’s best to replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable
performance. It can be recharged hundreds of times before it needs replacing.
Don’t store the battery in high temperature areas for long periods of time. It’s
best to follow these storage rules:
䡲 Less than one month:
-4° F to 140° F (-20° C to 60° C)
䡲 More than one month:
-4° F to 113° F (-20° C to 45° C)
Disposal of Lithium Ion (LiIon) Batteries
Do not handle a damaged or leaking LiIon battery as you can be burned.
For safe disposal options of your LiIon batteries, contact your nearest Sprint
authorized service center.
Special Note: Be sure to dispose of your battery properly. In some areas, the
disposal of batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited.
Safety
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
369
Radiofrequency (RF) Energy
Understanding How Your Phone Operates
Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and receiver. When it’s turned on, it
receives and transmits radiofrequency (RF) signals. When you use your phone, the
system handling your call controls the power level. This power can range from
0.006 watts to 0.2 watts in digital mode.
Knowing Radiofrequency Safety
The design of your Sprint PCS Treo device complies with updated NCRP standards
described below.
In 1991-92, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) and the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) joined in updating ANSI’s 1982
standard for safety levels with respect to human exposure to RF signals. More
than 120 scientists, engineers and physicians from universities, government
health agencies and industries developed this updated standard after reviewing
the available body of research. In 1993, the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) adopted this updated standard in a regulation. In August 1996, the FCC
adopted hybrid standard consisting of the existing ANSI/IEEE standard and the
guidelines published by the National Council of Radiation Protection and
Measurements (NCRP).
370
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
Body-Worn Operation
To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if you wear a handset
on your body, use the Sprint-supplied or -approved carrying case, holster, or other
body-worn accessory. If you do not use a body-worn accessory, ensure the
antenna is at least 7/16 inch (1.5 centimeters) from your body when
transmitting. Use of non-Sprint-approved accessories may violate FCC RF
exposure guidelines.
For more information about RF exposure, visit the FCC Web site at www.fcc.gov.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) for Wireless Phones
The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of RF energy absorbed
in the head of a user of a wireless handset.
All phones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates a substantial
margin of safety. As stated above, variations in SAR values between different
model phones do not mean variations in safety. SAR values at or below the
federal standard of 1.6 W/kg are considered safe for use by the public.
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
371
Safety
The SAR value of a phone is the result of an extensive testing, measuring, and
calculation process. It does not represent how much RF the phone emits. All
phone models are tested at their highest value in strict laboratory settings. But
when in operation, the SAR of a phone can be substantially less than the level
reported to the FCC. This is because of a variety of factors including its proximity
to a base station antenna, phone design, and other factors. What is important to
remember is that each phone meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs
do not represent a variation in safety.
The highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Treo™ 700P smart device by Palm
are:
Maximum SAR Values
CDMA Cellular
CDMA PCS
Held to Ear
1.48 (W/Kg)
1.13 (W/Kg)
Body-Worn
.896 (W/Kg)
.589 (W/Kg)
The highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Treo™ 700P smart device by Palm on
SM
the Sprint Power Vision Network (EVDO mode) are:
Maximum SAR Values
Body-Worn
EVDO Cellular
.801 (W/Kg)
EVDO PCS
.678 (W/Kg)
FCC Radiofrequency Emission
FCC Radiofrequency Emission
This phone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission Guidelines and is certified
with the FCC as:
FCC ID number: O8F93001.
More information on the phone’s SAR can be found from the following
FCC Web site:
https://gullfoss2.fcc.gov/prod/oet/cf/eas/reports/GenericSearch.cfm.
372
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Device
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged
into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such an occurrence.
Description of ESD
Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of excess electrons
on the surface of a material. To most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing
more than annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing
your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock—the
discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob. This little shock discharges
the built-up static electricity.
ESD-Susceptible Equipment
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
373
Safety
Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry, so when working with electronic
devices, take measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your
Palm® device, from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections against ESD into
its products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could build up
to levels that could harm your equipment. Any electronic device that contains an
external entry point for plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is
susceptible to entry of ESD. Devices that you carry with you, such as your device,
build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built up
on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when the device is
connected to another device such as a docking station, a discharge event can
occur.
Precautions Against ESD
Make sure to discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself and your
electronic devices before touching an electronic device or connecting one device
to another. The recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution
before connecting your device to your computer, placing the device in a cradle, or
connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many ways, including the
following:
䢇 Ground yourself when you’re holding your mobile device by simultaneously
touching a metal surface that is at earth ground. For example, if your
computer has a metal case and is plugged into a standard three-prong
grounded outlet, touching the case should discharge the ESD on your body.
䢇 Increase the relative humidity of your environment.
䢇 Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.
Conditions That Enhance ESD Occurrences
Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the
environment include the following:
䢇 Low relative humidity.
䢇 Material type (The type of material gathering the charge. For example,
synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural fibers like cotton.)
䢇 The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect electronic devices.
While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge static
electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD events, you may
want to take extra precautions to protect your electronic equipment against ESD.
374
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
Owner’s Record
The model number, regulatory number, and serial number are located on a
nameplate inside the battery compartment. Record the serial number in the
space provided below. This will be helpful if you need to contact us about your
phone in the future.
Model: Sprint Power Vision Smart Device Treo™ 700P , by Palm
Serial No.:
User’s Guide Proprietary Notice
CDMA Technology is licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of
the following patents:
Safety
4,901,307 5,109,390 5,267,262 5,416,797
5,506,865 5,544,196 5,657,420 5,101,501
5,267,261 5,414,796 5,504,773 5,535,239
5,600,754 5,778,338 5,228,054 5,337,338
5,710,784 5,056,109 5,568,483 5,659,569
5,490,165 5,511,073
User’s Guide template version 5B (October 2005)
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
375
376
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
S e c ti o n 8 B
Specifications
In This Section
⽧
Specifications
Specifications
Section 8B: Specifications
377
Specifications
Radio
CDMA 1900/800 MHz digital dual-band
EVDO and 1xRTT
Phone features
Personal speakerphone
Microphone mute option
Hands-free headset jack
(2.5mm, 3-barrel connector)
TTY/TDD compatibility
Processor technology
Intel XScale™ processor, 312MHz
Expansion
SD/MultiMediaCard/SDIO card slot
Battery
Rechargeable Lithium Ion
3-way calling
3.5 hours full charge time
Removable for replacement
Palm OS version
Palm OS® 5.4.9
Camera (not included
on all models)
Still image capture resolution (1280 x 1024), 1.3 megapixel
2x digital zoom
Video capture resolution (352 x 288)
Automatic light balance
Size/weight
5.08" x 2.28" x 0.89" with antenna
(129 mm x 58 mm x 22.5 mm)
6.4 ounces (180 g)
Connectivity
Bluetooth® wireless technology
(1.2 compliant)
IR
Display
Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)
65,536 colors (16-bit color)
User-adjustable brightness
378
Section 8B: Specifications
Keyboard
Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator
Backlight for low lighting conditions
Included software
Phone (including Palm OS,
Favorites, Dial Pad)
Sprint PCS® Picture Mail
(multimedia messages)
Camera
Calculator (basic/advanced)
Camcorder
Memos
Pics&Videos
World Clock
Web browser (Internet)
Voice Memo
Sprint PCS Business ConnectionSM
Documents To Go
®
VersaMail (email)
Calendar
Contacts
Tasks
Palm® Desktop software/
HotSync® manager
Sprint TV
Pocket Tunes™ (music)
SMS (text messages)
System requirements
Windows 2000 or XP with USB port
Mac OS 10.2–10.3.x with USB port
Later versions may also be supported
32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)
Section 8B: Specifications
5% to 90% Relative Humidity (RH)
379
Specifications
Operating and storage
temperature range
380
Section 8B: Specifications
Index
Numerics
1xEV-DO (EVDO) technology 353
1xRTT connections 100
1XRTT protocol 353
24-hour clock 288
5-way navigator 7, 40, 299
911 phone calls 95, 97, 299
Index
381
Index
A
AC charger 9, 13, 15, 307
accented characters 48, 49
accessing
Alert screen 103
alternate characters 48
applications 52
calculator 248
command buttons 42
common tasks 78
corporate accounts 306
Dial Pad 57, 68
email 110, 142, 143
Guest Book 150
On Demand information 116
online album 200
Palm online support 350
personal accounts 24, 351
personal information 24, 301
Phone Book 220
Sprint PCS Vision services 111
Sprint Web site 351
streamed media channels 215
VersaMail 128
voicemail 23, 65, 66
voicemail messages 23
Web pages 152, 159
World Clock 246
accessories 276, 307
Account Name field 127
account passwords 24
Account Setup command 126
Account setup complete screen 126
accounts 23, 24, 122
See also Sprint PCS Vision accounts;
Sprint Power Vision accounts
Accounts command 126, 136
Accounts Setup dialog box 126, 127
actions 7, 41, 78
activating Treo smart device 5, 20
Active Call view 67, 69, 71
active calls 63, 67, 74
See also phone; phone calls
ActiveSync servers 124, 141
adapters 307
Add Bookmark command 167
Add Call button 68, 71
Add Contact command 70
Add Favorite dialog box 79
Add New Number dialog box 70
Add Songs to Playlist screen 210, 211
Add to a Contact button 70
adding
accessories 276, 307
alerts 137, 228
backgrounds 232
Bluetooth devices 176
bookmarks 167–169
caller ID pictures 221
categories 290
cities to World Clock 246
contacts 70, 220
emoticons 147, 150
events 226, 228, 229
favorite buttons 78–81
memos 240
multimedia messages 148–150
partnerships 85, 272
passkeys 85
passwords 23, 24, 303
phone numbers 70, 74
QuickText phrases 150
signatures 140
songs to playlists 210, 211
speed-dial buttons 79
tasks 235
text messages 146, 150
voice captions 188
wallpaper 92
Address Book 76
382
addresses
adding multiple 80
creating links for 152
entering multimedia message 148
entering text messaging 146
highlighting 42
multiple recipients and 150
selecting 42
adjusting screen brightness 17, 286
adjusting volume
alert tones 89
device ringer 7, 88, 90
music 209
phone calls 21, 90
Advanced Encryption Standard 123
Advanced Mode (calculator) 248, 249,
250
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) 123
After deleting a message pick list 135
Agenda view 224, 232
See also Calendar application
alarm 10, 88, 89, 101
See also alerts
alarm clock 247
Alarm Preset check box 234
Alarm Sound pick list 234, 239
alarm tones 233
album pick list 201
albums (Pics&Videos) 195–197, 200
alert icon (device) 101
Index
Index
application preferences 27, 290–291,
293
application settings. See application
preferences
applications
accessing available 52
arranging 290, 291
associating with buttons 80, 292
beaming 266
composing email messages and 130
copying 280
customizing 290
cycling through 52
displaying information about 260
displaying list of 291
displaying menus for 43, 46
displaying private entries in 304
downloading 163, 256
expansion cards and 279
5-way navigator and third-party 40
getting help with 350
highlighting 52
installing 255–257, 346, 347
making phone calls and 69
opening 50–52, 279
removing 258, 259
searching 254
selecting synchronization 31, 34
sending over Bluetooth
connections 261
383
Index
alert icon (voicemail) 66
Alert Manager symbol 321
Alert me of failures check box 138
Alert me of new mail check box 137
alert preferences 89
Alert screen 64, 103, 151, 228
Alert Sound pick list 137
alert tones 89, 90, 157
alerts
adding 137, 228
assigning to tasks 239
caution for incoming calls and 63
customizing 89
deleting 103
displaying 101, 103, 228
receiving messages and 151, 157
selecting 103
untimed events and 228
voicemail and 64, 66
Alerts command 137, 157
aligning screen 289
Alt key 46, 353
alternate characters 48, 49
anniversaries 228
Answer button 62, 71
answering phone 23, 62, 63, 71, 87
answering service. See voicemail
antenna 10
application buttons 7, 50, 80, 292
setting default 293
synchronizing 33, 34
transferring 27
troubleshooting 347
uninstalling 315
updating information in 33
Applications button 52
Applications view 50, 52, 291, 353
appointments. See Calendar application;
events
Archive folder 258
area conversions (calculator) 249
arrow icons (documentation) 40
Ask to add unknown phone numbers
after calls check box 70
assistance 24, 350, 352
Attach from device option 149
Attach from Online option 149
Attach Signature check box 140
attachments
displaying 133, 143
document files and 132
downloading 134
pictures and videos and 131
removing 131
ringtones and 133
storing large 346
voice memos and 132, 245
Attachments dialog box 131, 132
attendees (events) 231
384
audio 82
See also music
audio captions 188, 193, 194, 201
audio files 206
audio formats 206
audio player. See Pocket Tunes
Auto answer pick list 87
Auto Lock Device box 301
Auto naming pick list 192
Auto Sync command 136
Auto Sync dialog box 136
Auto-Keyguard preference 298
automated invoicing information 352
automatic resets 349
automatic shut-off 296
Auto-off after pick list 296
auto-off interval 296, 353
B
back view (device) 8
Background check box 232
background music 194
backgrounds 232
backing up information 33
backlight (keyboard) 46
Backspace key 59
Backup folder 258, 259
Basic Mode (calculator) 248
basics ii, 20, 33, 350
battery
Index
Index
Bluetooth application
device connections and 175, 176
hands-free devices and 84–85
partnerships and 179
synchronizing and 272
Bluetooth button 84
Bluetooth devices
connecting to 84, 174–177
routing phone calls to 85, 86
setting preferences for 87
temporarily disabling 17
transferring calls from 68
troubleshooting 333
viewing status of 101
Bluetooth icon 84, 101
Bluetooth Preferences screen 101
Bluetooth technology 174, 354
bookmarks 167–169, 264
Bookmarks view 168
Bookmarks view icon 168
border glow (highlight) 42
brightness (screen) 17, 286
broadband connections 119
browser. See Web browser
built-in applications 255, 258, 350, 379
built-in camera. See camera
built-in security software 297
business cards 223, 266
Business Connection application. See
Sprint PCS Business Connection
385
Index
charging 13–14, 16
conserving power for 16–17
inserting 11
recharging 16
replacing 12, 307, 317
specifications for 378
viewing status of 13, 14, 101, 102
battery door release 8, 11
battery icon 14, 16, 101
battery-charge indicators 13, 102
battery-ready indicator 13, 14
Bcc option (email) 130
beam (defined) 353
Beam Business Card command 223
Beam Category command 265
Beam command 265, 266
Beam Receive pick list 296
Beam Receive, disabling 17
Beam Status dialog box 265, 266
beaming information 264–267, 353
beeps 55, 86
See also alerts
bell 103, 321
belt clip 307
billing information 112
birthdays 228
blank favorite buttons 79, 80
blank screens 320
blinking bell 103, 321
blinking indicator light 14, 103
business directories 110
buttons
accessing command 42
accidentally pressing 68
assigning Quick Keys to 78, 79, 80
changing favorite 81
creating favorite 78–81
disabling onscreen 299
enabling dialog box 43
5-way navigator 40
highlighting 42
opening applications and 50
reassigning 7, 292
restoring factory defaults for 292
selecting 41
setting preferences for 292
waking up screen with 55
buzz (headset) 83
C
cache 171, 346
cache preferences 171
calculating disk space 27–28
calculator 248–250
Calculator icon 248
calendar
See also Calendar application; events
accessing 110, 142, 143
adding alerts to 228
adding backgrounds to 232
386
customizing 231–233
displaying 51
moving through 225
setting default view for 232
setting first day of week for 288
transferring to smart device 27
Calendar application
See also calendar
changing screen fonts for 287
color-coding events with 230
defining custom intervals for 229
displaying current event in 93, 102
managing events with 224–231
opening 7, 51, 93
selecting views 224
setting display options in 231
setting sound preferences 233
updating information in 33, 34
viewing event status for 102
Calendar button 7, 224
call forwarding 73
call forwarding icon 101
Call forwarding pick list 74
call lists 61
Call Log button 61, 80
Call Log dialog box 61, 70
call waiting 71, 98
call waiting alerts 63
Call Waiting dialog box 71
caller ID 70
Index
Index
memos 240
tasks 235, 237
cautions iii, 9
Cc option (email) 130
CDs 208
Center button 44
Change Lock Code setting 300
changing
bookmarks 168
color scheme 289
contact information 222
default settings 283
events 231
favorite buttons 81
information 26
passwords 24, 304
playlists 211
screen fonts 287
channel icon 214
characters
accessing international 353
defining Quick Keys and 78
displaying alternate 48
displaying hexadecimal 249
entering alternate 48
entering from keyboard 47
maximum in notes 240
maximum in text messages 146
messages and invalid 147, 150
searching on 254
Index
caller ID pictures 91, 110, 186
caller ID preferences 89, 91
caller ID ringtones 91
calling cards 352
calling Sprint Customer Service 24, 351
calls. See phone calls
Camcorder applicaion 196
Camcorder application 188, 191
Camcorder icon 188
camera
customizing 191
location of built-in 8
power consumption and 16
specifications for 378
taking pictures 186–188
Camera applicaion 196
Camera application 187, 191
Camera icon 187
Cancel button (Active Call) 68
Cancel Spkr button 67
Caps Lock 47
Card Info application 281
Card Info button 281
card readers 207
categories 221, 263, 290
Category command 290
Category pick list
applications 290
contacts 92
events 230, 232, 233
387
charge indicator icon 102
charge indicator light 13, 14
charger adapter 15
charger cable 13, 15, 32
charger jack 13, 15
chargers (optional) 307
charging connector 9, 13, 15
charging the battery 13–14, 16
chat preferences 156
Chat screen 154, 157
chat session icon 155
chat sessions 109, 154
City pick list 246
Clear Cache preferences 171
Clear Voicemail Icon button 96
clock 246, 288
clock preferences 294
closing Internet connections 119
collect calls 352
color palette 191
color preferences 289
color-coded category marker 233
color-coding events 230
colored backgrounds 42
Colors Theme screen 289
command buttons 42
command shortcuts (menus) 43
common tasks 78
compact discs 208
company names 305
388
completed tasks 238
completion dates 238
Compose dialog box 146, 149
Compress Day View check box 232
compressed files 256
computers. See CPUs
conduit software 31
Conf button 73
conference calls 71, 72, 74, 75
configuring Sprint PCS Vision
services 108
Confirm message deletions check
box 156
Connect to the Internet dialog box 108
connecting smart device 32
connecting to power sources 14
connection icons 100, 112
Connection Manager 118
connections
accessing Internet and 55, 118, 354
Bluetooth devices 84, 174–177
closing 119
overview 26
PCs and 32, 118
power consumption and 16
precautions for 374
receiving information over
Bluetooth 262
sending information over
Bluetooth 261
Index
Index
creating business cards and 223
opening 220
updating information in 33, 34
Contacts buttons 80, 220
Contacts list 59, 147, 222
context-sensitive actions 7
conversion functions 249
cookies 170
coprocessing units. See CPUs
copying
applications 280
multimedia files 202
phone numbers 57
pictures 196
text 165
video clips 196
corporate accounts 122, 141, 142, 306
corporate address lists 143
coverage area 17, 100, 330
Coverage in/out pick list 90
coverage maps 351
CPUs
connecting to 32, 118
interactions with 26
removing applications from 259
transferring music from 206
updating information on 33
Create a New Contact button 70
Create chats from messages pick list 156
389
Index
Sprint PCS Vision services 111
Sprint Power Vision services 114
troubleshooting 330, 334, 340
TTY devices and 96
viewing status of 100, 338, 340
connectivity 378
constants 250
Contact Edit dialog box 91, 221
contacts
adding 220
assigning pictures to 91, 299, 300
changing information for 222
creating 70
deleting 222
dialing by 58
entering multiple 220, 224
entering phone numbers for 70, 94
marking as private 221
searching for 58, 59, 92
selecting caller ID ringtones for 91, 92
sending email to 129
synchronizing 33, 34
text messaging to 147
transferring to smart device 27
viewing phone numbers for 59
Contacts application
adding contacts and 220
changing contact information
and 222
changing screen fonts for 287
creating
alerts 137, 228
backgrounds 232
bookmarks 167–169
categories 290
contacts 70, 220
email messages 129
events 226, 228, 229
favorite buttons 78–81
memos 240
multimedia messages 148–150
partnerships 85, 272
passkeys 85
passwords 23, 24, 303
playlists 210–211
QuickText phrases 150
signatures 140
speed-dial buttons 79
tasks 235
text messages 146, 150
voice captions 188
wallpaper 92
current event 93, 102
Current Privacy pick list 303
Customer Service (Sprint) 24, 351
customer support (Palm) 350
customizing
alerts 89
application buttons 292
applications 290–291
390
calendar 231–233
camera 191
favorite buttons 78
messages 156
phone 88–96
screen 286–289
tasks 238
Treo smart device 283
VersaMail 136
Web browser 170–172
D
Daily Repeating Events check box 233
data connection icons 100, 112
data networks. See network connections
data service icons 338, 340
data services 114, 338, 340
Date & Time Preferences screen 294
date formats 288
Date pick list 288
Date stamp pick list 191
dates. See calendar
Day view 225, 232
Daylight Savings Time 294
decimal display formats 249, 288
decreasing phone volume 21
Default Apps preferences 293
default password 24
Default View pick list 232
defaults, restoring 292
Index
Index
hands-free devices and 84
synchronizing and 272
device resets 29, 301, 314–316
devices
See also Bluetooth devices; Palm OS
devices; Treo smart device
electrostatic discharge and 373
naming 29, 84, 272
physically-impaired disabilities and 96
upgrades and 29
Dial another call? prompt 71
Dial button 60
Dial Extra Digits Automatically option 80
Dial Number dialog box 60
Dial Pad 56, 57, 68, 92
Dial Pad buttons 80
Dial Preferences command 93
Dial Preferences dialog box 94
dial tones 95
dialing 57–60, 68, 80, 94
dialing preferences 93
dialing shortcuts 79
dialog boxes 43, 350, 354
dial-up networking 354
dial-up networking icon 101
digital movies 109
digital networks 98
digital pictures 109
dimming device screen 51
Directory Assistance 352
391
Index
Delete command 135
Delete Contact command 222
Delete From pick list 258
Delete Item command 238, 240
Delete Old command 135
deleting
alerts 103
applications 258, 259
attachments 131
bookmarks 168
contacts 222
device names 29
email 134, 346
events 231
favorite buttons 81
groups of messages 135
memos 240
photos 188
playlists 211
private entries 304
tasks 238
text messages 153
videos 189
desktop software 26, 31, 34
See also Palm Desktop software
Details button 42
Device Name field 84, 272
device names
defined 354
deleting 29
Disable Cookies check box 170
Disable Images check box 171
Disable JavaScript check box 171
disabling
onscreen buttons 299
Treo smart device 17
Discovery icon 176
discovery results list 176
Discovery Results screen 261
disk space 27–28, 346
Display my name in chat window as
option 157
display options (calendar) 231
Display Options command 231
display. See screen
displaying
alerts 101, 103
alternate characters 48
applications 290, 291
attachments 133, 143
calendar 51
connection status 100, 338, 340
contact information 222
current event 102
decimal values 249, 288
email messages 102, 128
events 93, 233
favorite button assignments 79
items in pick lists 44
menu items 43, 46
392
numeric pages 66
on-device guide 350
pending alerts 228
phone numbers 59
pictures 193, 200, 202
private entries 303
recently dialed numbers 61
recording time 190
status information 7, 100
streamed media 214, 216
tasks 232, 237, 238
tips 350
unread messages 232
video clips 194, 202
Web pages 160, 166, 167
docking cradle 307
documentation ii, 4, 40, 350
Documents application 143, 242, 243
Domino mail servers 123
downloading
applications 163, 256
attachments 134
email messages 136
files 139, 163
from the Web 163–164
images 110
ringtones 88, 109
songs 206
Sprint PCS Connection Manager 118
downward-pointing arrows 44
Index
Drafts button 130
Drafts folder 150
DTMF tones 95
Due Date pick list 235
due dates 235, 237, 238
Index
393
Index
E
E-911 service feature 95
earpiece 7, 68
eBooks 16
Edit Bookmarks command 168
Edit Category dialog box 92
Edit Favorites Button command 81
Edit Favorites Pages command 78, 81
Edit QuickText option 150
editing. See changing
Effects pick list 191
electrostatic discharge 373–374
email
accessing 110, 142, 143, 306
active phone calls and 69
adding attachments to 131–133
adding links to 152
adding signatures to 140
addressing 80
attaching voice memos to 245
checking status of 128
checking unread messages for 102,
232
configuring for VersaMail 125–127
copying to multiple recipients 130
creating 129
deleting 134, 346
getting messages 128, 136, 138, 141
highlighting addresses 42
marking priority for 130
maximum message size for 139
power consumption for 16
removing attachments from 131
responding to 129
saving drafts 130
sending 130
setting alerts for 137
setting default browser for 293
sorting 128
Sprint PCS Business Connections
and 111
switching accounts for 136
synchronizing 123, 143
troubleshooting 334–337
viewing attachments in 133, 143
viewing messages 102, 128
email accounts 122, 124
email applications 31, 51, 122
Email buttons 80
Email icon 125, 128
email message icon 102
email preferences 136–140
email providers 122, 124, 125
emergency phone calls 95, 97, 299
emoticons icon 147, 150
emotive symbols 150
Empty battery icon 14
Empty Trash command 135
Enable Background Playback check
box 210
Enable Local Network Time box 294
entering
information 26, 33, 47
passkeys 176, 177
passwords. See passwords
phone numbers 57, 58, 92
errors 349
Escalate ring tone volume check box 88
ESD (electrostatic discharge) 373–374
EVDO technology 353
event conflicts 102, 232
event icon 102
events
See also calendar; Calendar application
adding alerts for 228
adding notes to 231
assigning time zones to 227
changing 231
checking status of 102
color-coding 230
creating 226, 228, 229
deleting 231
displaying 93, 233
purging 231
394
rescheduling 231
scheduling 226
synchronizing 33, 34
transferring to smart device 27
viewing duration of 232
Excel files 132, 133, 242, 243
Exchange mail servers 123
exiting pick lists 44
expansion card slot 10, 276, 378
expansion cards
copying applications to 280
downloading to 163, 164
formatting 281, 282
moving pictures to 196
opening applications on 279
overview 276
removing applications from 258
storing information on 346
transferring music to 206
viewing information about 281
extending battery life 16
extensions (phone calls) 68, 80, 94
Extra Digits button 65, 68
Extra Digits option 80
F
fade setting 232
FAQs 351
favorite buttons
changing 81
Index
Index
flight mode 55
folder icon 134
folder pick list 129
folders 129, 357
Font command 287
fonts 287
forgetting passwords 301, 304
formats (email) 139
Formats command 288
Formats Preferences screen 288
formatting
date and time 288
expansion cards 281, 282
numbers 288
forwarding phone calls 73–74, 101
Free Space information 28
freeing memory 171, 238, 258, 346
frequently asked questions 351
front view (device) 6
Full battery icon 14
full charge (battery) 13
function keys 46
functions 249
G
Game Volume pick list 285
games 16, 109
Games icon 109
Get BC icon 142
Get Good icon 143
Index
creating 78–81
defined 354
deleting 81
dialing with 59, 79
displaying in Phone application 93
locating blank 79
naming 79
upgrading and 78
Favorites pages 79, 81
features 43, 109
fields 41, 44
files
attaching to email 133
downloading 139, 163
installing quarantined 29
location of quarantied 27
opening 243
streaming from Web pages 164
transferring 27
financial calculator 249
financial information 117
Find dialog box 254
Find Text on Page command 166
finding
blank favorite buttons 79
contacts 58, 59, 92
Sprint PCS Vision user names 111
text 166, 254
5-way navigator 299
Flash mode 74
395
getting started ii, 20, 33, 350
Glossary 353
Go to Next Message option 135
GoodLink application 122, 143, 354
graphics. See images
green lightning bolt 14
Guest Book 150
H
handset speaker 7
hands-free car kit 82, 84
hands-free devices
compatible headsets for 82
connecting to 9, 84–86
features described 86
setting preferences for 87
setting up 84
troubleshooting 333–334
Handsfree Preferences screen 87
Hands-free Setup button 85
Hang Up All button 67, 69, 72
hard resets 301, 315
hardware 4
headphones 82
headset button 83
headset icon 101
headset jack 9
headsets 9, 69, 82, 83
hearing-impaired services 96
help 24, 257, 348, 351
396
hexadecimal characters 249
Hide Records setting 303
hiding private entries 303
highlighting
applications 52
items on screen 41
menu items 43
phone numbers 60
pick lists 44
text 42
Web links 42, 161
high-speed connections 100, 119
hints 301
History command 166
History list 166
Hold button 68, 71
holidays 228
home city 246
home pages 170
HotSync button 32, 35
HotSync cable 32, 35, 307
HotSync connector 9
HotSync cradle 307
HotSync manager 354
HotSync operations 28, 35, 354
See also synchronization
HTML formats 139
hyperlinks. See Web links
Index
Index
backing up 33
beaming 264–267, 353
changing 26
entering 26, 33, 47
locking 297
losing 282, 301, 315
marking as private 302
protecting 24, 302
receiving automated invoicing 352
receiving over Bluetooth
connections 262
recharging battery and 16
restoring 301
sending over Bluetooth
connections 261
setting owner preferences for 305
storing 346
synchronizing 16, 26, 31, 33
transferring 27
updating 26, 33
information screens 41
Infrared port. See IR port
infrared-enabled devices 10
inserting battery 11
Installation CD 5, 30
installation wizard 31
installer 255
installing
applications 255–257, 346, 347
bonus software 255
397
Index
I
icons 100, 109, 291
Ignore button 62, 72
Ignore with Text button 62, 72
images
creating wallpaper from 92
disabling Web page 171
downloading 110
saving 164
setting preferences for 191
troubleshooting 343
inactive data connections 100
inactive devices 302
Inbox
displaying messages in 102, 128
message descriptions in 155
selecting chat sessions from 154
sorting messages in 128
Inbox folder 129
Inbox icons 128
Incoming command 138
Incoming dialog box 138
incoming message icon 155
incompatible applications 27
increasing phone volume 21
indicator light 7, 13, 14, 103
Info command 27
Info screen 27, 260
information
accessing 24, 301
Palm desktop software 5, 30
quarantined files 29
Sprint PCS Connection Manager 118
synchronization software 30
third-party applications 319
interference 331, 333
international characters 353
international clock 246, 288
international phone numbers 94
international travel adapters 307
Internet connections
accessing 118, 354
closing 119
installing from 256
setting up proxy server for 172
troubleshooting 340
viewing online album from 200
Internet features 55
invalid characters 150
invoicing information 352
IR devices 354
IR port 10, 264, 354
items on screen 41, 42
iTunes 205
K
key presses 45
keyboard
accessing alternate characters on 48
dialing with 58
398
locking 297, 299
overview 45–48
restoring factory defaults for 292
selecting menu items from 43
setting timed events with 226
setting up Quick Keys for 78, 79, 80
silencing ringer from 63
keyboard backlight 46
keyboard shortcuts 292
Keyguard 54, 297
Keyguard preferences 298, 299
Known Caller pick list 88
L
Label color pick list 157
labeling favorite buttons 79
language settings 320
language-impaired services 96
large attachments 346
Late Breaking News & Photos
selection 116
launching applications 50–52, 279
LED display 7
length conversions 249
lens (camera) 8
letters. See characters
liability 2
light. See indicator light
lightning bolts 14
Li-Ion battery. See battery
Index
Index
Lotus Notes servers 124, 142
lowercase letters 47
low-lighting conditions 46
M
Mac operating systems
removing applications and 259
requirements for 26
synchronizing with 31, 34
transferring music from 207
transferring pictures from 29
mail. See email
mail servers 124
Mail Service pick list 126, 127
Main View 289
Manage Sound list 133
MAPI servers 124
maps 117, 351
marking private contacts 221
Mask Records setting 303
masking private entries 303
mathematical constants 250
mathematical functions 249
maximizing battery life 16
Maximum message size option 139
MDTV (Mobile Digital TV) 109
media features 16
media formats 206
media players 16
Index
Li-Ion technology 354
links. See Web links
list screens 41, 42
list view 291
List/Thumbnail icon 195
listening to music 82, 203–211
listening to voice captions 193, 201
lists 44
Lithium Ion technology 354
loading Web pages 342
locating
blank favorite buttons 79
contacts 58, 59, 92
Sprint PCS Vision user names 111
text 166, 254
location information 95
Location ON option 95, 100
location privacy icon 100
location-based services 95
locations, transmitting 95
lock codes 20, 300
Lock Device screen 302
lock icon 258, 265, 266
Lock Phone options 300
locking smart device 301–302
locking the keyboard 297, 299
logic functions (calculator) 249
losing information 282, 301, 315
Lost Password box 304
Lotus Notes 110
399
memory
freeing 171, 258, 346
purging events and conserving 231
setting cache 171
memory consumption 346
memos
See also voice memos
synchronizing 33, 34
transferring to smart device 27
Memos application
changing screen font for 287
creating memos and 240
opening 51, 240
updating information in 33, 34
Memos icon 240
Menu button 43
menu button 7
Menu key 46
menus 43, 46
message alerts 151, 157
Message buttons 80
Message Format pick list 139
message preferences 156
Message view (Inbox) 129, 134
messages
See also email; multimedia messages;
text messages
adding Web links to 152
addressing 80
chat sessions and 154
400
checking status of 101, 102, 232
customizing 156
dialing from 60
drafting 130
inserting emotive symbols in 150
listening to voicemail 64
removing groups of 135
retrieving 65, 101
setting maximum size for 139
sorting 128, 152
truncated 128
Messaging application 146, 150, 156
Messaging button 7, 51, 109
messaging icon (voicemail) 66
metric conversions 249
microphone 9, 68, 83
Microphone sounds pick list 191
Microsoft Excel spreadsheets See Excel
files
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
accounts 220, 224, 275
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
servers 124, 141
Microsoft MAPI servers 124
Microsoft Office Manager See
Documents application
Microsoft Outlook. See Outlook
Microsoft Windows. See Windows
Microsoft Word documents 242, 243
migrating to Treo smart device 27
Index
Index
multi-phone accounts 24
multiple recipients 80, 130, 150
music
adjusting volume 209
answering phone calls and 63
changing playlists for 211
downloading 206
listening to 82, 203–211
memory consumption and 346
pausing 209
setting background playback for 210
transferring from CDs 208
music files 206
Mute button 68
N
name preferences 305
names
email accounts and user 126, 127
sorting on 152
Sprint PCS Vision accounts and 111
synchronizing devices and 29
naming
Bluetooth devices 272
email accounts 126
expansion cards 281
favorite buttons 79
picture albums 195
smart device 29, 84, 272
NationalAccess connections 342
401
Index
military time 288
mirror 8
Mobile Digital TV 109
mobile networks 330
mobile phone. See phone; Treo smart
device
model numbers 375
modems 118–119, 354, 355
Money selection 117
monitoring signal strength 100
Month view 225, 233
mouthpiece 9
Movies selection 117
MP3 files 206
MPEG-4 formats 202
Multi-connector port 9
multimedia message icon 155
multimedia messages
addressing 148
attaching to email 131
attaching voice memos to 245
character restrictions for 150
creating 148–150
inserting predefined phrases in 150
online services for 158
sending 150
sending and receiving 109
viewing status of 155
MultiMediaCard cards 276
MultiMediaCards 10
Nationwide Sprint PCS Network 98, 109
navigation bar (Web browser) 162
navigator 7, 40
navigator buttons 40
network connections 98, 100, 330–334
Network Selection pick list 99
New Bookmark screen 167
New button 42
New events use time zones box 227
new lines 240
New Message screen 129
news information 116
No Service message 100
nonwireless features 55
Note button 221
notes 221, 231, 236
See also messages
notifications 64, 66, 138
See also alerts
number display formats 250
numbers
displaying as decimals 249, 288
entering 47, 226
formatting 288
storing in calculator 250
Numbers pick list 288
numeric pages 66
O
offline viewing 167
402
OK button 42
On Demand categories 117
On Demand feature 115–117, 355
On Demand icon 110, 115
On Demand screen 116, 117
On Demand Service 115
On phone power off check box 300
one-touch message access 23
online forums 350
online photo album 200, 201
online services 108
opening
Alert screen 103
application menus 46
applications 50–52, 279
calculator 248
Dial Pad 57, 68
email attachments 133, 143
files 243
text messages 62
Web pages 161, 342
World Clock 246
operating systems 355
Operator Services 352
Optimized mode 343
Option key 46, 47, 50, 355
Option Lock 47
optional passwords 24
options 44, 351
organizer features 16
Index
organizer information 123
Outbox 130, 155
Outbox button 130
outgoing message icon 155
outgoing messages 147
Outlook
accessing 110, 142, 143
calendar events and 231
corporate accounts and 141
entering information with 26
multiple contacts and 220
synchronizing information and 31, 34,
231, 268
time zone information and 227
overdue tasks 232, 237
Owner Preferences screen 305
Index
403
Index
P
page icon 155
Page view 166
pages 66
paired relationships. See partnerships
Palm Desktop software
corporate accounts and 141
defined 355
entering contacts and 220
entering information with 26
installing 5, 30
security password and 304
synchronizing from 31, 34
Palm Media application 202
Palm online support 350
Palm OS (defined) 355
Palm OS applications 255
See also applications
Palm OS database files 255
Palm OS devices
beaming information to 264
calculating disk space on 27–28
installing synchronization software
for 30
transferring information from 27
Palm OS software 27
Palm OS version 378
Palm Powered devices 350
Palm Software Installation CD 5, 30
PalmOS5 Incompatible Apps
directory 27
PalmSoftware.pkg icon 31
paper clip icon 131, 133
Partial battery icon 14
partnerships
communicating with 174
creating 85, 272
defined 355
hands-free devices and 84
passkeys 85, 176, 177
Password box 301
password hints 301
passwords
accessing voicemail and 23
adding to phone numbers 68, 80
assigning system 301
changing 24, 304
creating 23, 24, 303
email accounts and 126, 127
entering voicemail 64, 65
forgetting 304
online photo album and 200
Paste command 165
pasting phone numbers 57
pasting text 165
patches 258
Pause button 209
pausing
music 209
voice memos 245
PCs
connecting to 32, 118
interactions with 26
removing applications from 259
transferring music from 206
updating information on 33
PCS service plans. See Sprint PCS Vision
accounts; Sprint Power Vision accounts
PCS Voice Command service. See Sprint
PCS Voice Command service
PDF files 133
pending alerts 151, 228
404
pending messages 147
performance 16, 84
personal accounts 24, 351, 352
personal address book 76
personal computers. See PCs
personal contacts 110
personal information 24, 301, 305
See also private entries
personal information managers 319
See also PIM software
phone
See also phone calls; phone numbers
accessing directory assistance for 352
accessing operator assistance for 352
adding speed-dial buttons for 79
adjusting ringer volume for 90
answering 23, 62, 63, 71, 87
customizing 88–96
dialing 57–60, 68, 80, 94
enabling as modem 118–119
getting started with 21
hands-free devices and 82, 83, 84
hanging up 7, 67, 69, 72
Internet connections and 119
locking 299
not activated 20
opening applications and 69
power consumption and 16
redialing 61
roaming and 98–99
Index
Index
phone calls
See also phone; phone numbers
adding a second 71
adjusting volume for 21, 90
emergency services for 95, 97
ending 67, 69, 72, 73
forwarding 73–74, 101
making 21, 57–61, 69, 72, 76
managing 67, 74
placing on hold 68, 71
receiving 23, 62–63, 71
routing to Bluetooth devices 85, 86
screening 91
sending to voicemail 62, 72
switching to a second 72
transmitting location during 95
Phone Display Options command 92
Phone Display Options dialog box 92
phone headsets 9, 69, 82, 83
Phone Info command 22, 111
Phone Info screen 22, 111
Phone Lock command 299, 300
phone numbers
adding emergency 300
adding links for 152
adding prefixes to 94
adding to Call forwarding list 74
adding to Contacts list 70
assigning Quick Keys to 78, 79, 80
copying and pasting 57
405
Index
selecting alert tones for 90
selecting ringtones for 88–89, 91
setting dialing preferences for 93
setting up call waiting for 71
specifications for 378
temporarily disabling 17
text messaging and 150
three-way calling and 72
TTY devices for 96
turning on and off 7, 16, 54, 55
Phone application
accessing Dial Pad from 57
customizing appearance of 92
defined 355
displaying calendar in 225
displaying current events in 93
managing active calls with 67–75
monitoring device status from 100
opening 7, 51, 56
selecting wallpaper for 92, 198
setting caller ID preferences and 91
setting dialing preferences and 93
setting phone preferences and 95
setting roaming preferences and 98
setting sound preferences and 88, 89
phone as modem features 355
phone book 86
See also Address Book
Phone button 7, 56
dialing extra digits for 68, 80, 94
displaying recently dialed 61
entering 57, 58, 92
getting device 22
highlighting 42, 60
selecting 60, 61, 74
setting owner preferences for 305
viewing 59
Phone Off message 100
phone preferences 74, 95
Phone Preferences command 95
Phone Preferences screen 74, 95
Phone screen. See Phone application
phone-to-computer connections 118
photo albums. See albums
Photo Settings screen 191
photos
See also pictures
adding voice captions 188
backing up 202
creating wallpaper with 92, 198
deleting 188
email attachments and 131, 133
printing 158
saving 188, 189
pick lists 42, 44
Pics&Videos application
copying albums and 196
creating albums and 195
opening 193
406
playing videos and 194
updating information in 33, 34
viewing pictures and 193
viewing slide shows and 194
Pics&Videos button 193
Picture box 91
picture formats 193, 202
Picture Mail
accessing online album for 200
active phone calls and 69
creating messages and 148
defined 356
opening 109
sending messages and 146
setting up Web account for 148
troubleshooting 338
Picture Mail icon 109
Picture Mail message icon 102
Picture Mail Online Services 158
Picture Mail service 186
Picture Mail Web site 200
picture thumbnails 232
pictures
See also photos; multimedia messages
adding as backgrounds 232
adding caller ID 91, 110, 186, 221
adding to albums 195
adding to messages 149
assigning to contacts 91, 198
attaching to email 131
Index
Index
Powering off screen 55
PowerPoint files 132, 133, 243
precautions iii, 9, 374
preferences
alerts 89
buttons 292
chat sessions 156
dialing 93
email 136–140
hands-free devices 87
messages 156
phone 74, 95
roaming 98
Preferences dialog box 238
prefixes (phone numbers) 94
Premium Services 24
Preparing Vision Services dialog box 108
preset buttons 78
preset delays 302
pressing onscreen buttons 299
primary application 50
printing 158
prioritizing tasks 235, 239
priority settings
email 130
tasks 235
text messages 147
privacy flag 236
Privacy Mode check box 156
privacy settings 297
407
Index
copying 196
displaying 193, 200, 202
removing from albums 196, 199
rotating 198
selecting 91
synchronizing 33, 34
taking 8, 91, 187
transferring to smart device 29
uploading 200
PIM software 356
PIMs 319
plain text messages 139
playback 209, 245
playing
music 203–211
streamed media files 216
voice captions 193, 201
playlists 210–211
POP email accounts 138
POP protocol 138
ports 10, 32
power adapter 9, 13, 15, 307
power consumption 16, 17
Power Preferences screen 17, 296
power settings 17, 296
power sources 14
Power Vision accounts. See Sprint Power
Vision accounts
Power/End button 7, 54, 69
caution for pressing 63, 69
privacy status icon 100
Private box 303
private contacts 221
private entries 302–304
processor 378
programmable buttons 78
programs. See applications
Prompt sound pick list 191
protecting personal information 24, 302
protecting Treo smart device 297
Protocol pick list 127
proxy servers 172
PSAPs (public safety answering
points) 97
public safety answering points 97
punctuation 47
purchasing accessories 307
purchasing batteries 12
purchasing Premium Services 24
Purge command 153, 231, 238
Purge pick list 153
purging. See deleting
push synchronization 143
Q
quarantined applications 27, 29
quarantined files 27, 29
quick buttons 50, 55
Quick Install 355
Quick Install icon 257
408
Quick Keys 78, 79, 80
Quick Tour 350
QuickText icon 147
R
radio 378
random number generator 249
range (Bluetooth devices) 84, 333
readjusting screen 289
RealOne Player 206
reassigning buttons 7, 292
receiving phone calls 23, 62–63
rechargeable battery. See battery
recharging the battery 16
Record Completion Date check box 238
recording time 190
recording video clips 188, 191
recurring events. See repeating events
red lightning bolt 14
Redial list 61
redialing phone numbers 61
regulatory numbers 375
Reminder Sound pick list 234
reminders. See alerts
Remove from album command 196
removing. See deleting
Rename Card command 281
renaming expansion cards 281
Repeat Alarm pick list 234
repeat intervals (calendar) 229
Index
Index
roaming 98–99
Roaming icon 98, 101
Roaming message 100
Roaming pick list 89
Roaming Preferences command 99
Roaming Preferences screen 98, 99
roaming status 101
Rotate command 198
rotating pictures 198
Rows pick list 93
S
safe resets 315
safety guidelines 361
safety information iii
Save as Wallpaper command 198
Save Page command 167
saving
email attachments 134
images 164
notes 240
phone numbers 70
photos 188, 189
Web pages 167
schedules. See Calendar application
scheduling events 226
screen
activating items on 42
adjusting brightness 17, 286
automatically turning off 296
Index
Repeat pick list 229
repeating events 229, 233
repeating tasks 236
replacement stylus 307
replacing batteries 12, 307, 317
Reply button 129
rescheduling events 231
resets 29, 301, 314–316
resetting smart device 314–316
resolution 187
Resolution pick list 191
restoring defaults 292
restoring information 301
restoring private entries 304
restricting location information 95
retrieving voicemail messages 101
Review photos/videos pick list 192
ringer
adjusting volume 7, 90
silencing 63
ringer switch 10, 63, 284
ringer switch icon 101
Ringers icon 109
Ringtone pick list 91
ringtones
assigning to caller IDs 91, 221
assigning to contacts 91, 92
attaching to email 133
downloading 88, 109
selecting 88–89
409
customizing 286–289
dimming 51
disabling items on 297
highlighting items on 41
moving around on 40
realigning 289
selecting items on 42
selecting wallpaper for 110
specifications for 378
troubleshooting problems with 320
turning on and off 7, 54, 296, 302
waking up 50, 54, 69
screen fonts 287
screen savers 110
Screen Savers icon 110
screening phone calls 91
screens, scrolling through 41
scroll arrows 41
scrolling 41
SD cards 10, 276
SDIO cards 10, 276
searching for contacts 58, 59, 92
searching for signal 17
secondary application 50
secure connections 174
Secure Digital cards 10, 276
secure Web sites 343
security features 297
Security icon 301, 303, 304
security software 297
410
Select Media screen 131
selecting
applications 52, 279
chat sessions 154
menu items 43
options in pick lists 44
Web links 161
self-portrait mirror 8
sending
applications over Bluetooth 261
email 130
information over Bluetooth 261
multimedia messages 150
text messages 72, 147
voice memos 245
Sent folder 129, 155
serial numbers 375
servers 124
service plans. See Sprint PCS Vision
accounts; Sprint Power Vision accounts
Setup Devices screen 85, 176
Shift/Find key 47
Short DTMF Tones check box 95
Short Messaging Service (SMS) 356
shortcuts (menus) 43
Show Calendar event check box 93, 225
Show Categories check box 239
Show Category Column check box 233
Show Category List check box 232, 233
Show Completed Items check box 238
Index
Index
SMS (defined) 356
SMS messaging services 338, 339
Snooze button 103
soft resets 314
software 5, 26, 255, 379
See also applications
Software Installation CD 5, 30
software versions 27
Sort by Date command 152
Sort by Name command 152
Sort by pick list 238
sorting messages 128, 152
sorting tasks 238
Sound & Alerts screen 88, 89, 285
sound clips 148
sound files 133
Sound Mode icons 284
Sound Off icon 63
sound preferences 89, 109, 284
Sound Preferences command 88, 89, 233
sound settings. See sound preferences
sounds 89
spare battery 12
speaker 7, 9
speakerphone 9, 16, 67
speakers 7
special characters 47, 48, 49
specifications 378
speech-impaired services 96
speed-dial buttons 59, 79
411
Index
Show Due Dates check box 238
Show Due Tasks check box 232
Show Favorite buttons check box 93
Show Messages check box 232
Show Priorities check box 239
Show Records setting 303
Show Time Bars check box 232
Show timestamps check box 156
Show Wallpaper option 92
Shutter sound pick list 191
Side button 7, 90
signal
locating 55
low coverage areas and 330
monitoring strength 100
searching for 17
sending and receiving 10
Signal faded pick list 90
signal strength 16
signal-ready indicator 55
signal-strength icon 55
Signature command 140
signatures 140
silent alarm 284
sit files 256
Size button 27
Skip Pass Code feature 23
slide shows 194
sliders 41
smartphone. See Treo smart device
speed-dial icon 59
Spkr-phone button 67, 69
Sports selection 117
spreadsheets 242, 243
Sprint 411 352
Sprint Customer Service 24
Sprint PCS Accessory Hotline 307
Sprint PCS Business Connection 122
Sprint PCS Business Connection
application 7, 111, 142
Sprint PCS Business Connection icon 110
Sprint PCS Business Connection
service 356
Sprint PCS Connection Manager 118
Sprint PCS Operator Services 352
Sprint PCS Service 19
Sprint PCS Service Plan 108
Sprint PCS Vision 356
Sprint PCS Vision accounts 24, 98, 108
Sprint PCS Vision data services 159
Sprint PCS Vision home page 108
Sprint PCS Vision Service 109, 111
Sprint PCS Vision sessions 315
Sprint PCS Vision Smart Device. See Treo
smart device
Sprint PCS Vision symbols 109
Sprint PCS Vision user names 111
Sprint PCS Voice Command service 76–
77, 98
Sprint PCS Web page 351
412
Sprint Power Vision accounts 24, 98, 114
Sprint Power Vision connections 114
Sprint Power Vision Network 356
Sprint Power Vision Smart Device. See
Treo smart device
Sprint status message 100
Sprint TV application 109, 214–216, 356
SprintTV icon 109
Start With pick list 170
starting Sprint PCS Vision sessions 315
static 331, 333, 373–374
statistical functions 249
status icons (Inbox) 128
status icons (phone) 56, 100
status information 7, 100, 162
stereo adapters 203
stereo headphones 82, 203
stereo headsets 9, 69, 82, 83
stock ticker 117
storage capacity 276
storing
information 346
music files 207
notes 240
numbers 250
pictures 186, 200
video clips 186
streaming 214, 356
stylus 10, 40, 41, 307
sub-account passwords 24
Index
Index
system requirements 26, 379
system resets 315
System Volume pick list 285
T
Take new picture option 149
Take new video option 149
taking pictures 8, 91, 187
Talk button 7
Tap and Drag pick list 171
tapping 10, 40, 321
Task Details screen 235
tasks
accessing common 78
adding 235
completing 237, 238
customizing 238
deleting 238
displaying 232, 237, 238
prioritizing 235, 239
setting alerts for 239
sorting 238
synchronizing 33, 34
transferring to smart device 27
Tasks application
changing screen fonts for 287
managing tasks with 235–238
setting display options for 237
setting preferences for 238–239
updating information in 33, 34
Index
suggestions (VersaMail) 129
support 24, 350, 351
Swap button 72
symbols 47, 48, 49, 150, 353
sync button 32, 35
sync cable 26, 32, 35
sync connector 9
synchronization
Bluetooth devices and 271
corporate accounts and 141
defined 33
deleting private entries and 304
desktop software and 34
installing third-party applications
for 319
recommendations for 16, 33
removing applications and 258
restrictions for 28
troubleshooting 321–327
upgrades and 28
synchronization applications 31, 34, 322
synchronization complete message 35
synchronization software 26, 29, 30, 31,
319
synchronization-in-progress message 35
synchronizing email 123, 143
synchronizing information 26, 31, 33
See also synchronization
system errors 349
system passwords 301
413
Tasks icon 235
Tasks list screen 237, 238
TDD devices 96
technical support 24, 351
telecommunications devices 96
telephone. See phone
temperature 379
temperature conversions 249
text
changing screen font for 287
copying 165
entering 47, 240, 305
highlighting 42
searching for 166, 254
viewing against pictures 232
text fields 41
text message icon 102, 155
text messages
See also messages; multimedia
messages
addressing 146
character limit for 146
character restrictions for 147
creating 146, 150
deleting 153
dialing from 60
inserting predefined phrases in 147
online services for 158
opening 62
receiving 151
414
sending 72, 147
viewing status of 101, 102, 155
text messaging 16, 80, 109, 146, 154
Text Telephone devices 96
third-party applications
getting help with 257
installing 255, 346
navigator and 40
searching 254
transferring information from 27, 29
troubleshooting 347
uninstalling 315
third-party phone calls 352
third-party utilities 27
three-way calling 72
thumbnail images 92, 232
Thumbnail view 195, 199
time 190, 226, 247
See also clock
time bars 232
time formats 288
time intervals (calendar) 229
Time pick list 288
time stamps 156
Time Zone pick list 226
time zones 226, 294
timed events 226, 228, 233
Timed Events check box 233
tips 350
Tips command 350
Index
Index
monitoring status of 100–102
naming 84, 272
not turning on 16
removing applications from 258, 259
resetting 29, 301, 314–316
setting date and time for 294
setting up service for 19, 24
specifications for 378
synchronizing with 29, 33
temporarily disabling 17
third-party applications and 29
troubleshooting 350
unlocking 20, 301, 305
upgrading to 27–29
trigonometric functions 249
troubleshooting 319, 350
truncated messages 128
Trusted Devices button 176
trusted devices. See partnerships
trusted pairs. See partnerships
TTY devices 96, 97
TTY/TDD mode icon 101
TTY/TDD preferences 96
turning backlight on and off 46
turning off beeps and alarms 10
turning phone on and off 54, 55
turning screen on and off 54, 296
TV Guide 117
415
Index
Tips icon 350
To Do lists. See tasks
top view (device) 10
touchscreen. See screen
Touchscreen command 289
touch-sensitive actions 7
touch-tone dialing 95
transferring calls to voicemail 23
transmitting location information 95
Trash folder 134
travel adapters 307
Treo smart device
activating 5, 20
as wireless modem 354
changing color scheme for 289
changing default applications for 293
compatible hands-free devices for 82
components on 6, 8, 10, 40
components shipped 4
connecting to PCs 26
connecting to power sources 13, 15
customizing 283
entering owner information for 305
entering passwords for 301
extending storage capacity 276
getting additional information
about 350
getting phone number for 22
installing applications on 256
locking 301–302
U
unanswered calls 23
unauthorized calls 299
unauthorized users 23, 297
uninstalling applications 315
Unknown Caller pick list 89
unlocking Treo smart device 20, 301, 305
unread messages 102, 138, 155, 232
Unread messages check box 138
untimed events 228, 233
Untimed Events check box 233
Update Vision Profile command 349
updates (smart device) 351
updating
information 26, 33
World Clock 294
upgrades 27–29
Upload icon 200
Upload to Online Albums option 200
uploading pictures 200
uppercase letters 47
urgency levels. See priority settings
urgent messages 155
URLs 152, 170, 264
USB docking cradle 307
USB hub 32
USB port 32
USB sync cable 9, 32, 35, 307
Use color for pick list 157
User folder 357
416
User Guide 350
user names
email accounts and 126, 127
Sprint PCS Vision accounts and 111
V
vehicle charger 15
vehicle power adapter 307
VersaMail
creating and sending messages
and 129
customizing 136
deleting messages and 135
downloading attachments and 134
opening 128
retrieving messages and 128
setting priority options and 130
setting up accounts for 124, 125–127
version information 26, 27, 260
VGA resolution 378
Vibrate pick list 88, 89
vibrating alarm 88, 89, 284
video clips
See also multimedia messages
adding to messages 149
attaching to email 131
backing up 202
copying 196
deleting 189
displaying 194, 202
Index
Index
recently dialed numbers 61
recording time 190
status information 7, 100
streamed media 214, 216
tasks 232, 237, 238
tips 350
unread messages 232
video clips 194, 202
Web pages 160, 166, 167
virtual private networks 306
voice captions 188, 193, 194, 201
Voice Command service. See Sprint PCS
Voice Command service
Voice Memo application 244–245
voice memos 132, 148
voicemail
accessing 23, 65, 66
checking status of 101
entering passwords for 23, 64, 65
getting help with 351
playing messages in 64
retrieving messages from 65, 101
roaming and 98
sending calls to 62, 72
setting up 23, 64
viewing numeric pages for 66
voicemail account 23, 24
Voicemail Alert pick list 90
Voicemail button 64, 65, 81
Voicemail icon 64, 96, 101
417
Index
online services for 158
recording 188, 191
removing from albums 196, 199
streaming 214, 216
synchronizing 33, 34
video formats 202
video icon 214
video recording screen 190
View By pick list 291
viewing
alerts 101, 103
alternate characters 48
applications 290, 291
attachments 133, 143
calendar 51
connection status 100, 338, 340
contact information 222
current event 102
decimal values 249, 288
email messages 102, 128
events 93, 233
favorite button assignments 79
items in pick lists 44
menu items 43, 46
numeric pages 66
on-device guide 350
pending alerts 228
phone numbers 59
pictures 193, 200, 202
private entries 303
voicemail number 64
voicemail page icon 155
Voicemail Pass Code feature 23
Voicemail Quick Key 78
Voicemail screen 64, 66
volume
alert tones 89
device ringer 7, 88, 90
music 209
phone calls 21, 90
Volume button 7, 21, 90
volume conversions (calculator) 249
Volume pick list 88, 89
VPN clients 306
VPNs (virtual private networks) 306
W
waking up screen 50, 54, 69
wallpaper 92, 110, 186, 198, 289
warm resets 315
warnings iii, 9
Weather selection 117
Web browser
accessing Guest Book from 150
beaming from 264
connecting to Sprint PCS Vision home
page from 108
customizing 170–172
downloading files with 163, 164
enabling offline viewing in 167
418
finding text with 166
installing applications from 256
opening 51
overview 159
setting bookmarks for 167–169
setting default 293
troubleshooting 343
viewing Web pages from 160–162
Web browsing 16, 69, 159
Web icon 110
Web Link buttons 80
Web links 42, 152, 161
Web pages
accessing 152, 159
beaming 264
caching 171
copying text in 165
deleting saved 168
dialing from 60
displaying 160, 166
downloading files from 163, 164
enabling wide layouts for 160
loading 342
locating text in 166
saving 167
saving images on 164
setting default browser for 293
setting default view for 170
setting home page for 170
setting preferences for 170–172
Index
Index
World Clock icon 246
World Wide Web. See Web
Wrap Search box 166
Y
Year view 225
Z
ZIP codes 115
zip files 256
zoom settings 187
Index
signing onto Sprint PCS 351
troubleshooting 341
turning off images in 162
viewing offline 167
viewing status for 162
Web sites 110, 159
Web-based email 122
See also Internet connections
Week starts pick list 288
Week view 225
weights 249
Welcome screen 55
Wide Page Mode 161, 343
Windows operating systems
entering passwords and 304
installing applications from 256
removing applications and 259
requirements for 26
synchronizing with 34
transferring music from 206
wired headsets 82, 83
wireless connections 114
wireless coverage 17
wireless features 16
wireless headsets 82, 84
wireless modems 354
wireless synchronization 141
Word documents 242, 243
Word files 132, 133, 243
World Clock 246–247, 288
419
420
Index